TREA

Apoptosis signal-regulating kinase 1 inhibitors

Follow

Information

  • Patent Grant
  • 8178555
  • Patent Number
    8,178,555
  • Date Filed
    Tuesday, June 23, 2009
    15 years ago
  • Date Issued
    Tuesday, May 15, 2012
    12 years ago
Information
Abstract
The present invention relates to apoptosis signal-regulating kinase 1 (“ASK1”) inhibiting compounds of the formula
Description
RELATED APPLICATION

This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/075,121 filed Jun. 24, 2008, which is incorporated herein by reference.


FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to compounds that may be used to inhibit apoptosis signal-regulating kinase 1 (ASK1) as well as compositions of matter, kits and articles of manufacture comprising these compounds. The invention also relates to methods for inhibiting ASK1 and treatment methods using compounds according to the present invention. In addition, the invention relates to methods of making the compounds of the present invention, as well as intermediates useful in such methods. In particular, the present invention relates to ASK1 inhibitors, compositions of matter, kits and articles of manufacture comprising these compounds, methods for inhibiting ASK1, and methods and intermediates useful for making the inhibitors.


BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Apoptosis signal-regulating kinase 1 (ASK1), is a member of the mitogen-activated protein kinases (MAPKs) family, which are members of the serine/threonine kinase family. Wang et al. J. Biol. Chem. 1996, 271, 31607-31611, Ichijo et al. Science 1997, 275, 90-94. ASK1 is also known as mitogen-activated protein kinase kinase kinase 5 (MAPKKK5, MAP3K5), MAP/ERK kinase kinase 5 (MEKK5), MEK kinase 5, MEKK5, MAP/ERK kinase kinase 5. The protein kinase composes of 1375 amino acids encompassing 11 kinase subdomains; particularly a serine/threonine kinase domain in the middle part of the molecule with long NH— and COOH-terminal flanking regions. Wang et al. J. Biol. Chem. 1996, 271, 31607-31611, Ichijo et al. Science 1997, 275, 90-94; Tobiume et al. Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 1997, 239, 905-910; U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,080,546 and 6,194,187. The nucleotide sequence of ASK1 is accessible in the protein databases by the accession number NM—005923. ASK1 is ubiquitously expressed with the highest expression in the heart, pancreas, testis, and ovaries.


The MAP kinases mediate signal transduction from the cell surface to the nucleus via phosphorylation cascades. Egan and Weinbery Nature 1993, 365, 781-783.


The MAPK cascades are multifunctional intracellular signaling pathways that are evolutionarily conserved in all eukaryotic cells. Widmann et al. Physiol Rev 1999, 79, 143-180; Kyriakis and Avruch, J. Physiol Rev 2001, 81, 807-869; Ichijo Oncogene 1999, 18:6087-6093. All eukaryotic cells possess multiple MAPK pathways. In mammalian cells, three MAPK cascades that converge on ERKs, c-Jun N-terminal kinases (JNKs), and p38 MAP kinases have been extensively characterized. Egan and Weinbery Nature 1993, 365, 781-783; Boulton et al. Cell 1994, 65, 663-675; and Zhou et al. J. Biol. Chem. 1995, 270, 12665-12669 (the MAPK/ERK pathway); Derujard et al. Cell 1994, 76, 1025-1037; Galcheva-Gargova et al. Science 1994, 265, 806-808; Minden et al. Mol. Cell. Biol. 1994, 14, 6683-6688 (the c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK) pathway; and Lee et al. Science 1994, 265, 808-811, (the p38 MAPK pathways). ERK pathway is activated by various growth factors and closely linked to the regulation of cell cycle. The JNK and p38 pathways are preferentially activated by various cytotoxic stress such as UV radiation, X-ray, heat shock, osmotic shock, oxidative stress and pro-inflammatory cytokines such as tumor necrosis factor (TNF) and interleukin-1. Tibbles and Woodgett, Cell Mol, Life Sci. 1999, 55:1230-1254. JNK and p38 are thus also called stress-activated protein kinases (SAPKs).


Each MAPK cascade involves three classes of serine/threonine kinases, MAPK, MAPK kinanse (MAP2K) and MAP2K kinase (MAP3K). In the MAPK signaling cascades, MAP3K phosphorylates and thereby activates MAP2K in turn phosphorylates and activates MAPK. Activated MAPK may translocate to the cell nucleus and regulate the activities of transcription factors and thereby control gene expression. Sturgill and Wu, Biochim. Biophys. Acta 1993, 1092, 350; Nishida and Gotoh, Trends Biochem. Sci. 1993, 18, 128; Errede and Levin Curr. Opin. Cell Biol. 1993, 5, 254; Marshall Curr. Opin. Genet. Dev. 1994, 82.


MAP3Ks play pivotal roles in sensing and signaling of cellular and environmental stress. The MAP3Ks in the JNK and p38 pathways are highly divergent in number and structure. At least eleven MAP3Ks have been identified upstream of JNK, each of which activates single or multiple downstream MAPK cascades. This diversity and complexity are consistent with the variety of stimuli that activate MAPK pathways. Kyriakis and Avruch Physiol. Rev. 2001, 81, 807-869.


One of the important biological responses mediated through these stress-activated MAP kinase pathways appears to be the decision of cell fate by regulating apoptosis. The possible roles of the JNK pathway in pro-apoptosis signaling have been demonstrated by knockout mouse studies. Yang et al. Nature 1997, 389:865-870; Sabapathy et al. Curr. Biol. 1999, 9:116-125; Kuan et al. Neuron 1999, 22:667-676. Several lines of evidence have also suggested the pro-apoptotic roles of the p38 pathway. Xia et al. Science 1995, 270:1326-1331; Kawaski et al. J. Biol. Chem. 1997, 272:18518-18521; Harper and LoGrasso et al. Cell Signal. 2001, 13:299-310.


ASK1 was originally identified as an apoptosis-inducing MAP3K. ASK1 regulates the p38 and JNK pathways by directly phosphorylating and thereby activating their respective MAPKKs, MKK4(SEK1)/MKK7 and MKK3/MKK6. Wang et al. J. Biol. Chem. 1996, 271, 31607-31611; Ichijo et al. Science 1997, 275, 90-94. The activity of ASK1 is tightly regulated; a ubiquitously expressed reduction/oxidation protein thioredoxin (Trx) binds to the N-terminal and inhibits its activity. ASK1 is activated by various cytotoxic stresses including oxidative stress, endoplasmic reticulum (ER) stress, and calcium overload, and by receptor-mediated inflammatory signals such as tumor necrosis factor (TNF) and endotoxic lipopolysaccharide (LPS). Hayakaw et al. Microbes and Infection 2006, 8, 1098-1107; Saitoh et al EMBO J. 1998, 17:2596-2606; Nishitoh et al. Genes Dev. 2002, 16:1345-1355; Takeda et al. EMBO Rep. 2004, 5, 161-166; Nishitoh et al. Mol Cell 1998, 2, 389-395; Matsukawa et al. Nat Immunol 2005, 6, 587-592. It has been shown that ASK1 is required for apoptosis induced by oxidative stress, TNF and ER stresses. Nishitoh et al. Genes Dev. 2002, 16:1345-1355; Matsukawa et al. Nat Immunol 2005, 6, 587-592; Tobiume et al. EMBO Rep. 2001, 2:222-228. Overexpression of wild-type or constitutively active ASK1 induces apoptosis in various cells through mitochondria-dependent caspase activation. Saitoh et al EMBO J. 1998, 17:2596-2606; Kanamoto et al. Mol. Cell Biol. 2000, 20, 196-204; Hatai et al. J. Biol. Chem. 2000, 275, 26576-26588.


Recent studies revealed that ASK1 contributes not only to regulation of cell death but also has diverse functions in the decision of cell fate such as cytokine responses, cell differentiation, and innate immune responses. Matsukawa et al. J Biochem. (Toyko) 2004, 136, 261-265. Sayama et al. J. Biol. Chem. 2000, 276:999-1004; Takeda et al. J. Biol. Chem. 2000, 275:9805-9813; Sagasti et al. Cell 2001, 105:221-232; Kim et al. Science 2002, 297:623-626; Nishitoh et al. Genes Dev. 2002, 16:1345-1355; Matsukawa et al. Nat Immunol 2005, 6, 587-592; Tobiume et al. EMBO Rep. 2001, 2:222-228; Imoto, et al. Diabetes 2006, 55:1197-1204. Constitutively active ASK1 induces neurite outgrowth in PC12 cells. ASK1 is activated by CaMKII, which activates ASK1-p38 pathway in neurons, suggesting that ASK1 might play critical roles in synaptic plasticity. Moreover, TRAF6-ASK1-p38 pathway plays an essential role in inflammatory and innate immune responses. Hayakawa et al. Microbes and Infection 2006, 8, 1098-1107. It has also been demonstrated that ASK1 has a role in the pathogenesis of TNF-α-induced insulin resistance. Overexpression of wild-type ASK1 increases serine phosphorylation of insulin receptor substrate (IRS)-1, and decreases insulin-stimulated tyrosine phosphorylation of IIRS-1, leading to impair insulin signaling. Imoto, et al. Diabetes 2006, 55:1197-1204.


ASK1 is thus a pivotal component not only in stress-induced cell death but also in a broad range of biological activities in order for cells to adapt to or oppose various stresses. Modulating the activity of ASK1 potentially have beneficial effect in treating or preventing a wide range of diseases and conditions including, but not limited to, cardiovascular diseases, inflammatory diseases, autoimmune diseases, destructive bone disorders, neurodegenerative disorders, and metabolic diseases such as diabetes. Thompson, Science 1995, 267, 1456-1462; Yuan and Yanker Nature 2000, 407, 802-809; Los et al. Immunity 1999, 10, 629-639.


Currently, there are no known therapeutical agents that effectively inhibit the expression and/or activation of ASK1, and to date, strategies aimed at modulating ASK1 function have involved the use of antibodies, dominant negative and dominant active mutants of the protein.


U.S. Pat. No. 5,981,265 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,074,861 claim methods for regulating MAP3K protein activity in a cell by transforming or transfecting the cell with a nucleic acid that is capable of hybridizing under stringent conditions to a nucleic acid molecule encoding MAP3K1, MAP3K2, MAP3K3, MAP3K4, MAP3K5, and MAP3K6. Oligonucleotides for use in antisense, and triplex formation, as ribozymes, probes or primers and in other applications are generally disclosed. WO 01/07461 discloses antisense compositions and methods for using the antisense compositions to modulate the expression of MAP3K5 and treat diseases associated with expression of MAP3K5.


Consequently, there remains a long felt need for agents capable of effectively modulating the activity of ASK1. A small molecule inhibitor may be proof to be an effective means for regulating ASK1 activities.


SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to compounds that have activity for inhibiting ASK1. The present invention also provides compositions, articles of manufacture and kits comprising these compounds. In addition, the invention relates to methods of making the compounds of the present invention, as well as intermediates useful in such methods.


In one aspect, the invention is directed to compounds having the formula:




embedded image


wherein


Na denotes a nitrogen atom;


ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-11)aryl, (C7-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C1-11)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 substituents, where said 1-5 substituents of ring A are each independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, oxo, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted;


X is selected from the group consisting of CR3 and N;


R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubsituted or substituted, or R1 and R2 are taken together to form a (C3-6)cycloalkyl;


R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (C1-6)alkoxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, sulfonyl, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, hetero(C1-6)alkyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-6)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, hetero(C1-5)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, (C3-6)alicyclyl, hetero(C1-5)alicyclyl, each substituted or unsubstituted; and


R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each substituted or unsubstituted;


provided that


when X is N and ring A is a heteroalicyclyl, R1 and R2 are not both hydrogen;


when X is CH, ring A is a five-membered heteroaryl, and one of R1 and R2 is hydrogen, the other one of R1 and R2 is not an unsubstituted or substituted (C1-4)alkyl; and


when X is CH, ring A is as defined above, and one of R1 and R2 is a carbonyl, the substituent on said carbonyl is selected from the group consisting of carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, and unsubstituted or substituted cyclyl excluding cyclopropyl.


It is noted in regard to the above embodiment, the present invention is intended to encompass all pharmaceutically acceptable ionized forms (e.g., salts) and solvates (e.g., hydrates) of the compounds, regardless of whether such ionized forms and solvates are specified since it is well known in the art to administer pharmaceutical agents in an ionized or solvated form. It is also noted that unless a particular stereochemistry is specified, recitation of a compound is intended to encompass all possible stereoisomers (e.g., enantiomers or diastereomers depending on the number of chiral centers), independent of whether the compound is present as an individual isomer or a mixture of isomers. Further, unless otherwise specified, recitation of a compound is intended to encompass all possible resonance forms and tautomers. With regard to the claims, the language “compound comprising the formula,” “compound having the formula” and “compound of the formula” is intended to encompass the compound and all pharmaceutically acceptable ionized forms and solvates, all possible stereoisomers, and all possible resonance forms and tautomers unless otherwise specifically specified in the particular claim.


In another aspect, the invention is directed to pharmaceutical compositions that comprise an ASK1 inhibitor according to the present invention as an active ingredient. Pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention may optionally comprise 0.001%-100% of one or more inhibitors of this invention. These pharmaceutical compositions may be administered or coadministered by a wide variety of routes, including for example, orally, parenterally, intraperitoneally, intravenously, intraarterially, transdermally, sublingually, intramuscularly, rectally, transbuccally, intranasally, liposomally, via inhalation, vaginally, intraoccularly, via local delivery (for example by catheter or stent), subcutaneously, intraadiposally, intraarticularly, or intrathecally. The compositions may also be administered or coadministered in slow release dosage forms.


In another aspect, the invention is directed to kits and articles of manufacture for treating disease states associated with ASK1.


In one embodiment, the kit comprises a composition comprising at least one ASK1 inhibitor of the present invention in combination with instructions. The instructions may indicate the disease state for which the composition is to be administered, storage information, dosing information and/or instructions regarding how to administer the composition. The kit may also comprise packaging materials. The packaging material may comprise a container for housing the composition. The kit may also optionally comprise additional components, such as syringes for administration of the composition. The kit may comprise the composition in single or multiple dose forms.


In another aspect, the invention is directed to articles of manufacture that comprise a composition comprising at least one ASK1 inhibitor of the present invention in combination with packaging materials. The packaging material may comprise a container for housing the composition. The container may optionally comprise a label indicating the disease state for which the composition is to be administered, storage information, dosing information and/or instructions regarding how to administer the composition. The article of manufacture may also optionally comprise additional components, such as syringes for administration of the composition. The article of manufacture may comprise the composition in single or multiple dose forms.


In yet another aspect of the invention is directed to methods for preparing compounds, compositions, kits, and articles of manufacture according to the present invention. For example, several synthetic schemes are provided herein for synthesizing compounds according to the present invention.


In yet other aspect, the invention is directed to methods of using compounds, compositions, kits and articles of manufacture according to the present invention.


In one embodiment, the compounds, compositions, kits and articles of manufacture are used to inhibit ASK1.


In another embodiment, the compounds, compositions, kits and articles of manufacture are used to treat a disease state for which ASK1 possess activity that contributes to the pathology and/or symptomology of the disease state.


In another embodiment, a compound is administered to a subject wherein ASK1 activity within the subject is altered, preferably reduced.


In another embodiment, a prodrug of a compound is administered to a subject that is converted to the compound in vivo where it inhibits ASK1.


In another embodiment, a method of inhibiting ASK1 is provided that comprises contacting an ASK1 with a compound according to the present invention.


In another embodiment, a method of inhibiting ASK1 is provided that comprises causing a compound according to the present invention to be present in a subject in order to inhibit ASK1 in vivo.


In another embodiment, a method is provided for using a compound according to the present invention in order to manufacture a medicament for use in the treatment of a disease state that is known to be mediated by ASK1, or that is known to be treated by ASK1 inhibitors.


It is noted that in the various methods of using the compounds of the present invention are intended, regardless of whether prodrug delivery is specified, to encompass the administration of a prodrug that is converted in vivo to a compound according to the present invention. It is also noted that certain compounds of the present invention may be altered in vivo prior to inhibiting ASK1 and thus may themselves be prodrugs for another compound. Such prodrugs of another compound may or may not themselves independently have ASK1 inhibitory activity.





BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES


FIG. 1 illustrates SEQ ID NO:1 and SEQ ID NO: 2 referred to in this application.





DEFINITION

Unless otherwise stated, the following terms used in the specification and claims shall have the following meanings for the purposes of this Application.


It is noted that, as used in the specification and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Further, definitions of standard chemistry terms may be found in reference works, including Carey and Sundberg “ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 5th ED.” Vols. A (2007) and B (2007), Springer Science and Business Media, New York. Also, unless otherwise indicated, conventional methods of mass spectroscopy, NMR, HPLC, protein chemistry, biochemistry, recombinant DNA techniques and pharmacology, within the skill of the art are employed.


“Alicyclyl” means a cyclic radical that may be saturated or partially unsaturated with one, two or more double or triple bonds. Alicyclyl as defined in this Application include monocyclic or polycyclic radicals, where the ring atoms of a monocyclic alicyclyl are all carbon atoms, and the ring atoms of the cycle which is part of the polycyclic alicyclyl and through which the polycyclic radical attaches to the parent molecule are all carbon atoms. It is noted that alicyclyl encompasses cycloalkyl. (CX)alicyclyl and (CX-Y)alicyclyl are typically used where X and Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the ring assembly. Examples of alicyclic moieties include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclohexane, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, cycloheptyl, cycloheptenyl, cycloheptadienyl, cyclooctanyl, cyclooctenyl, cyclooctadienyl, inden-1-yl, inden-6-yl, fluorin-1-yl, fluroin-9-yl, 2,3-dihydroquinolin-6-yl, decalin, norbornene, norbornadiene, and the like.


“Aliphatic” means a moiety characterized by a straight or branched chain arrangement of constituent carbon atoms and may be saturated or partially unsaturated with one, two or more double or triple bonds.


“Alkenyl” means a straight or branched, carbon chain that contains at least one carbon-carbon double bond (—CR═CR′— or —CR═CR′R″, wherein R, R′ and R″ are each independently hydrogen or further substituents). Examples of alkenyl include vinyl, allyl, isopropenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, heptenyl, 1-propenyl, 2-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, and the like. In particular embodiments, “alkenyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C2-20)alkenyl, a (C2-15)alkenyl, a (C2-10)alkenyl, a (C2-5)alkenyl or a (C2-3)alkenyl. Alternatively, “alkenyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C2)alkenyl, a (C3)alkenyl or a (C4)alkenyl.


“Alkenylene” means a straight or branched, divalent carbon chain having one or more carbon-carbon double bonds (—CR═CR′—, wherein R and R′ are each independently hydrogen or further substituents). Examples of alkenylene include ethene-1,2-diyl, propene-1,3-diyl, methylene-1,1-diyl, and the like. In particular embodiments, “alkenylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C2-20) alkenylene, a (C2-15) alkenylene, a (C2-10) alkenylene, a (C2-5) alkenylene or a (C2-3) alkenylene. Alternatively, “alkenylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C2) alkenylene, a (C3) alkenylene or a (C4) alkenylene.


“Alkoxy” means an oxygen moiety having a further alkyl substituent. The alkoxy groups of the present invention can be optionally substituted.


“Alkyl” represented by itself means a straight or branched, saturated, aliphatic radical having a chain of carbon atoms, optionally with one or more of the carbon atoms being replaced with oxygen (See “oxaalkyl”), a carbonyl group (See “oxoalkyl”), sulfur (See “thioalkyl”), and/or nitrogen (See “azaalkyl”). (CX)alkyl and (CX-Y)alkyl are typically used where X and Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the chain. For example, (C1-6)alkyl includes alkyls that have a chain of between 1 and 6 carbons (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and the like). Alkyl represented along with another radical (e.g., as in arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl and the like) means a straight or branched, saturated aliphatic divalent radical having the number of atoms indicated or when no atoms are indicated means a bond (e.g., (C6-10)aryl(C1-3)alkyl includes, benzyl, phenethyl, 1-phenylethyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 2-thienylmethyl, 2-pyridinylmethyl and the like). In particular embodiments, “alkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C1-20)alkyl, a (C1-15)alkyl, a (C1-10)alkyl, a (C1-5)alkyl or a (C1-3)alkyl. Alternatively, “alkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C1)alkyl, a (C2)alkyl or a (C3)alkyl.


“Alkylene”, unless indicated otherwise, means a straight or branched, saturated or unsaturated, aliphatic divalent radical. (CX)alkylene and (CX-Y)alkylene are typically used where X and Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the chain. For example, (C1-6)alkylene includes methylene (—CH2—), ethylene (—CH2CH2—), trimethylene (—CH2CH2CH2—), tetramethylene (—CH2CH2CH2CH2—), 2-methyltetramethylene (—CH2CH(CH3)CH2CH2—), pentamethylene (—CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—), and the like. In particular embodiments, “alkylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C1-20)alkylene, a (C1-15)alkylene, a (C1-10)alkylene, a (C1-5)alkylene or a (C1-3)alkylene. Alternatively, “alkylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C1)alkylene, a (C2)alkylene or a (C3)alkylene.


“Alkylidene” means a straight or branched, saturated, aliphatic radical connected to the parent molecule by a double bond. (CX)alkylidene and (CX-Y)alkylidene are typically used where X and Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the chain. For example, (C1-6)alkylidene includes methylidene (═CH2), ethylidene (═CHCH3), isopropylidene (═C(CH3)2), propylidene (═CHCH2CH3), allylidene (═CH—CH═CH2), and the like. In particular embodiments, “alkylidene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C1-20)alkylidene, a (C1-15)alkylidene, a (C1-10)alkylidene, a (C1-5)alkylidene or a (C1-3)alkylidene. Alternatively, “alkylidene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C1)alkylidene, a (C2)alkylidene or a (C3)alkylidene.


“Alkynyl” means a straight or branched, carbon chain that contains at least one carbon-carbon triple bond (—C≡C— or —C≡CR, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent). Examples of alkynyl include ethynyl, propargyl, 3-methyl-1-pentynyl, 2-heptynyl and the like. In particular embodiments, “alkynyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C2-20)alkynyl, a (C2-15)alkynyl, a (C2-10)alkynyl, a (C2-5)alkynyl or a (C2-3)alkynyl. Alternatively, “alkynyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C2)alkynyl, a (C3)alkynyl or a (C4)alkynyl.


“Alkynylene” means a straight or branched, divalent carbon chain having one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds (—CR≡CR′—, wherein R and R′ are each independently hydrogen or further substituents). Examples of alkynylene include ethyne-1,2-diyl, propyne-1,3-diyl, and the like. In particular embodiments, “alkynylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C2-20) alkynylene, a (C2-15) alkynylene, a (C2-10) alkynylene, a (C2-5) alkynylene or a (C2-3) alkynylene. Alternatively, “alkynylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C2) alkynylene, a (C3) alkynylene or a (C4) alkynylene.


“Amido” means the radical —NR—C(═O)— and/or —NR—C(═O)R′, wherein each R and R′ are independently hydrogen or a further substituent.


“Amino” means a nitrogen moiety having two further substituents where, for example, a hydrogen or carbon atom is attached to the nitrogen. For example, representative amino groups include —NH2, —NHCH3, —N(CH3)2, —NH((C1-10)alkyl), —N((C1-10)alkyl)2, —NH(aryl), —NH(heteroaryl), —N(aryl)2, —N(heteroaryl)2, and the like. It is further understood that the two substituents may not be taken together with the nitrogen to which the substituents are attached to form a ring. Unless indicated otherwise, the compounds of the invention containing amino moieties may include protected derivatives thereof. Suitable protecting groups for amino moieties include acetyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, benzyloxycarbonyl, and the like.


“Animal” includes humans, non-human mammals (e.g., dogs, cats, rabbits, cattle, horses, sheep, goats, swine, deer, and the like) and non-mammals (e.g., birds, and the like).


“Aromatic” means a moiety wherein the constituent atoms make up an unsaturated ring system, where all ring atoms are in continuous pi (π) bonding and the total number of π electrons is equal to 4n+2. An aromatic ring may be such that the ring atoms are only carbon atoms or may include carbon and non-carbon atoms (See “heteroaryl”). Examples of all carbon aromatic rings include benzene, naphthalene and anthracene, and the like. Examples of heteo-aromatic rings include pyrrole, thiophene, furan, oxazole, thiazole, imidazole, pyrazole, isoxazole, isothiazole, 1,2,3-oxadiazole, 1,2,3-triazole, 1,3,4-thiadiazole, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, 1,3,5-triazine, infolizine, indole, isoindole, benzo[b]furan, benzo[b]thiophene, benzimidazole, benzthiazole, purine, quinoline, isoquinoline, cinnoline, phthalazine, quinazoline, quinoxaline, 1,8-naphthyridine, pteridine, acridine, phenazine, and the like.


“Aryl” means a monocyclic or polycyclic radical, wherein each ring is aromatic or when fused with one or more rings forms an aromatic ring assembly. When the aryl is monocylic, the ring atoms are all carbon atoms, and when the aryl is polycyclic, the ring atoms of a ring which is a component of the polycyclic radical and through which the polycyclic radical attaches to the parent molecule are all carbon atoms. Examples of aryl include phenyl, naphthalenyl, anthracenyl, acridin-2-yl, quinolin-6-yl, benzo[b]furan-5-yl, and the like. (CX)aryl and (CX-Y)aryl are typically used where X and Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the ring. In particular embodiments, “aryl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C3-14)aryl, a (C3-10)aryl, a (C3-7)aryl, a (C8-10)aryl or a (C5-7)aryl. Alternatively, “aryl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C5)aryl, a (C6)aryl, a (C7)aryl, a (C8)aryl, a (C9)aryl or a (C10)aryl.


“Azaalkyl” means an alkyl, as defined above, except where one or more of the carbon atoms forming the alkyl chain are replaced with substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen atoms (—NR— or —NRR′, wherein R and R′ are each independently hydrogen or further substituents). For example, a (C1-10)azaalkyl refers to a chain comprising between 1 and 10 carbons and one or more nitrogen atoms.


“Aza-cyclyl” means a heterocyclyl moiety containing at least one nitrogen atom and the point of attachment of the cyclyl is through the nitrogen atom.


“Bicycloalicyclyl” refers to a bicyclic radical comprising two fused, spiro or bridged rings that may be saturated or partially unsaturated with one, two or more double or triple bonds, and the ring atoms of the ring through which the bicyclic radical attaches to the parent molecule are all carbon atoms. Examples of bicycloalicyclyl include inden-5-yl, indolin-5-yl, 4,5-dihydrobenzo[b]thiophen-5-yl, and the like.


“Bicycloalkyl” refers to a saturated bicyclic radical comprising two fused, spiro or bridged rings, where the ring atoms of the ring through which the bicyclic radical attaches to the parent molecule are all carbon atoms. In particular embodiments, “bicycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C4-15)bicycloalkyl, a (C4-10)bicycloalkyl, a (C6-10)bicycloalkyl, or a (C8-10)bicycloalkyl. Alternatively, “bicycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C8)bicycloalkyl, a (C9)bicycloalkyl or a (C10)bicycloalkyl. Examples of bicycloalkyl include decahydronaphthalen-2-yl, octahydro-1H-inden-1-yl, decahydroquinolin-6-yl, octahydro-1H-indol-5-yl, and the like.


“Bicycloaryl” refers to an aromatic bicyclic radical comprising two fused, spiro or bridged rings, where both rings comprising the radical are aromatic rings, and where the ring atoms of the ring through which the radical attaches to the parent molecule are all carbon atoms. (CX)bicycloaryl and (CX-Y)bicycloaryl are typically used where X and Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the bicyclic ring assembly and directly attached to the ring. In particular embodiments, “bicycloaryl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (a (C4-15)bicycloaryl, a (C4-10)bicycloaryl, a (C6-10)bicycloaryl or a (C8-10)bicycloaryl. Alternatively, “bicycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C8)bicycloaryl, a (C9)bicycloaryl or a (C10)bicycloaryl. Examples of bicycloaryl include naphthalenyl, quinolin-6-yl, quinoxalin-6-yl, benzimidazol-5-yl, indol-5-yl, and the like.


“Bridging ring” and “bridged ring” as used herein refer to a ring that is bonded to another ring to form a compound having a bicyclic or polycyclic structure where two ring atoms that are common to both rings are not directly bound to each other. Non-exclusive examples of common compounds having a bridging ring include borneol, norbornane, 7-oxabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, and the like. One or both rings of the bicyclic system may also comprise heteroatoms.


“Carbamoyl” means the radical —OC(O)NRR′, wherein R and R′ are each independently hydrogen or further substituents.


“Carbocyclic” or “carbocyclyl” refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic radical where all the ring atoms are carbon atoms.


“Carbonyl” means the radical —C(═O)— and/or —C(═O)R, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent. It is noted that the carbonyl radical may be further substituted with a variety of substituents to form different carbonyl groups including acids, acid halides, aldehydes, amides, esters, and ketones.


“Carboxamido” means the radical —C(═O)—NR— and/or —C(═O)—NRR′, wherein each R and R′ are independently hydrogen or a further substituent.


“Carboxy” means the radical —C(═O)—O— and/or —C(═O)—OR, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent. It is noted that compounds of the invention containing carboxy moieties may include protected derivatives thereof, i.e., where the oxygen is substituted with a protecting group. Suitable protecting groups for carboxy moieties include benzyl, tert-butyl, and the like.


“Cyano” means the radical —CN.


“Cycloalkyl” refers to a saturated, monocyclic or polycyclic radical, where the ring atoms of a monocyclic radical are all carbon atoms, and the ring atoms of a ring that is a component of the polycyclic radical and through which the radical attaches to the parent molecule are all carbon atoms. (CX)cycloalkyl and (CX-Y)cycloalkyl are typically used where X and Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the ring assembly. For example, (C3-10)cycloalkyl includes cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, adamantan-1-yl, octahydro-1H-inden-2-yl, decahydronaphthyl, oxocyclohexyl, dioxocyclohexyl, thiocyclohexyl, 2-oxobicyclo[2.2.1]hept-1-yl, octahydro-1H-indol-5-yl, decahydroquinolinyl, and the like. In particular embodiments, “cycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C3-14)cycloalkyl, a (C3-10)cycloalkyl, a (C3-7)cycloalkyl, a (C8-10)cycloalkyl or a (C5-7)cycloalkyl. Alternatively, “cycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C5)cycloalkyl, a (C6)cycloalkyl, a (C7)cycloalkyl, a (C8)cycloalkyl, a (C9)cycloalkyl or a (C10)cycloalkyl.


“Cycloalkylene” refers to a divalent cycloalkyl as defined in this Application. (CX)cycloalkylene and (CX-Y)cycloalkylene are typically used where X and Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the ring assembly. In particular embodiments, “cycloalkylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C3-14)cycloalkylene, a (C3-10)cycloalkylene, a (C3-7)cycloalkylene, a (C8-10)cycloalkylene or a (C5-7)cycloalkylene. Alternatively, “cycloalkylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C5)cycloalkylene, a (C6)cycloalkylene, a (C7)cycloalkylene, a (C8)cycloalkylene, a (C9)cycloalkylene or a (C10)cycloalkylene.


“Cyclyl” and “cyclic” refers to a radical comprising a continuous array of atoms. Cyclyl and cyclic as defined herein may be monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic, and include fused, spiro, or bridged polycyclics, and each of the cyclic components may be aromatic, partially unsaturated, or saturated, and the ring atoms are all carbon atoms or optionally one or more of the ring atoms are heteroatoms.


“Disease” specifically includes any unhealthy condition of an animal or part thereof and includes an unhealthy condition that may be caused by, or incident to, medical or veterinary therapy applied to that animal, i.e., the “side effects” of such therapy.


“EC50” means the molar concentration of an agonist that produces 50% of the maximal possible effect of that agonist. The action of the agonist may be stimulatory or inhibitory.


“Fused ring” as used herein refers to a ring that is bonded to another ring to form a compound having a bicyclic or polycyclic structure where the ring atoms that are common to both rings are directly bound to each other. Non-exclusive examples of common fused rings include decalin, naphthalene, anthracene, phenanthrene, indole, furan, benzofuran, quinoline, and the like. Compounds having fused ring systems may be saturated, partially saturated, carbocyclics, heterocyclics, aromatics, heteroaromatics, and the like.


“Halo” means fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo.


“Heteroalkyl” means alkyl, as defined in this Application, provided that one or more of the atoms within the alkyl chain is a heteroatom. In particular embodiments, “heteroalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C1-20)alkyl, a hetero(C1-15)alkyl, a hetero(C1-10)alkyl, a hetero(C1-5)alkyl, a hetero(C1-3)alkyl or a hetero(C1-2)alkyl. Alternatively, “heteroalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C1)alkyl, a hetero(C2)alkyl or a hetero(C3)alkyl.


“Heteroalicyclyl” or “heterocyclic” means an alicyclyl, as defined in this Application, provided at least one of the ring atoms is a heteroatom such as nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. The nitrogen atoms can be optionally quaternerized or oxidized and the sulfur atoms can be optionally oxidized. It is noted that heteroalicycle encompasses heterocycloalkyl. (CX)heteroalicyclyl and hetero(CX-Y)alicyclyl are typically used where X and Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the ring assembly. Examples of heteroalicyclyl include pyrroline, imidazoline, pyrazoline, pyran, indene, indoline, fluorine, and the like.


“Heteroaryl” refers to an aryl as defined in this Application provided that at least one of the ring atoms of the ring through which the heteroaryl attaches to the parent molecule is a heteroatom. Monocyclic heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclic aromatic groups having five or six ring atoms, wherein at least one ring atom is a heteroatom and the remaining ring atoms are carbon. The nitrogen atoms can be optionally quaternerized and the sulfur atoms can be optionally oxidized. Heteroaryl groups of this Application include, but are not limited to, furanyl, imidazolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, oxazolyl, 1,2,3-oxadiazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyrazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolinyl, thiazolyl, 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl, triazolyl and tetrazolyl. “Bicyclic or tricyclic heteroaryls” include, but are not limited to, benzo[b]furan-3-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl, benzimidazol-2-yl, imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinyl, quinazolin-2-yl, and the likes. The heteroaryl groups of this invention can be substituted or unsubstituted. In particular embodiments, “heteroaryl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C1-13)aryl, a hetero(C2-13)aryl, a hetero(C2-6)aryl, a hetero(C3-9)aryl or a hetero(C5-9)aryl. Alternatively, “heteroaryl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C3)aryl, a hetero(C4)aryl, a hetero(C5)aryl, a hetero(C6)aryl, a hetero(C7)aryl, a hetero(C8)aryl or a hetero(C9)aryl.


“Heteroatom” refers to an atom that is not a carbon atom. Particular examples of heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.


“Heteroatom moiety” includes a moiety where the atom by which the moiety is attached is not a carbon. Examples of heteroatom moieties include —NR—, —N+(═O−)—, —O—, —S— or —S(O)2—, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent.


“Heterobicycloalicyclyl” refers to a bicycloalicyclyl radical as defined in this Application provided that at least one of the ring atoms of the ring through which the heterobicycloalicyclic radical attaches to the parent molecule is a heteroatom.


“Heterobicycloalkyl” means a bicycloalkyl radical as defined in this Application, provided that at least one of the ring atoms of the ring that is a component of the bicyclic radical and through which the heterocycloalkyl ring assembly attaches is a heteroatom. For example hetero(C9-12)bicycloalkyl as used in this application includes, but is not limited to, 3-aza-bicyclo[4.1.0]hept-3-yl, 2-aza-bicyclo[3.1.0]hex-2-yl, 3-aza-bicyclo[3.1.0]hex-3-yl, and the like. In particular embodiments, “heterobicycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C1-14)bicycloalkyl, a hetero(C4-14)bicycloalkyl, a hetero(C4-9)bicycloalkyl or a hetero(C5-9)bicycloalkyl. Alternatively, “heterobicycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C5)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C6)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C7)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C8)bicycloalkyl or a hetero(C9)bicycloalkyl.


“Heterobicycloaryl” means a bicycloaryl radical as defined in this Application, provided that at least one of the ring atoms of the ring which is a component of the bicyclic radical and through which the heterobicycloaryl radical attaches to the parent atom is a heteroatom. For example, hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl as used in this Application includes, but is not limited to, 2-amino-4-oxo-3,4-dihydropteridin-6-yl, quinolin-2-yl, and the like. In particular embodiments, “heterobicycloaryl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C1-14)bicycloaryl, a hetero(C4-14)bicycloaryl, a hetero(C4-9)bicycloaryl or a hetero(C5-9)bicycloaryl. Alternatively, “heterobicycloaryl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C5)bicycloaryl, hetero(C6)bicycloaryl, hetero(C7)bicycloaryl, hetero(C8)bicycloaryl or a hetero(C9)bicycloaryl.


“Heterocycloalkyl” means a cycloalkyl radical as defined in this Application, provided that at least one of the ring atoms of the ring through which the heterocycloalkyl radical attaches to the parent atom is a heteroatom. The heteroatom is independently selected from N, O, or S. Non-exclusive examples of heterocycloalkyl include piperidyl, 4-morpholyl, 4-piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, perhydropyrrolizinyl, 1,2-pyrazolidin-4-yl, 1,3-dioxanyl, 1,4-dioxoianyl and the like. In particular embodiments, “heterocycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C1-13)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C1-9)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C1-6)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C5-9)cycloalkyl or a hetero(C2-6)cycloalkyl. Alternatively, “heterocycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C2)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C3)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C4)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C5)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C6)cycloalkyl, hetero(C7)cycloalkyl, hetero(C8)cycloalkyl or a hetero(C9)cycloalkyl.


“Heterocycloalkylene” means a divalent heterocycloalkyl, wherein the heterocycloalkyl is as defined in this Application. In particular embodiments, “heterocycloalkylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C1-13)cycloalkylene, a hetero(C1-9)cycloalkylene, a hetero(C1-6)cycloalkylene, a hetero(C5-9)cycloalkylene or a hetero(C2-6)cycloalkylene. Alternatively, “heterocycloalkylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C2)cycloalkylene, a hetero(C3)cycloalkylene, a hetero(C4)cycloalkylene, a hetero(C5)cycloalkylene, a hetero(C6)cycloalkylene, hetero(C7)cycloalkylene, hetero(C8)cycloalkylene or a hetero(C9)cycloalkylene.


“Heterocyclyl” means a cyclyl as defined in this Application provided that at least one of the ring atoms is a heteroatom.


“Hydroxy” means the radical —OH.


“IC50” means the molar concentration of an inhibitor that produces 50% inhibition of the target enzyme.


“Imino” means the radical —CR(═NR′) and/or —C(═NR′)—, wherein R and R′ are each independently hydrogen or a further substituent.


“Iminoketone derivative” means a derivative comprising the moiety —C(NR)—, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent.


“Isomers” means compounds having identical molecular formulae but differing in the nature or sequence of bonding of their atoms or in the arrangement of their atoms in space. Isomers that differ in the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “stereoisomers.” Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed “diastereomers” and stereoisomers that are nonsuperimposable mirror images are termed “enantiomers” or sometimes “optical isomers.” A carbon atom bonded to four nonidentical substituents is termed a “chiral center.” A compound with one chiral center has two enantiomeric forms of opposite chirality. A mixture of the two enantiomeric forms is termed a “racemic mixture.” A compound that has more than one chiral center has 2n−1 enantiomeric pairs, where n is the number of chiral centers. Compounds with more than one chiral center may exist as ether an individual diastereomer or as a mixture of diastereomers, termed a “diastereomeric mixture.” When one chiral center is present a stereoisomer may be characterized by the absolute configuration of that chiral center. Absolute configuration refers to the arrangement in space of the substituents attached to the chiral center. Enantiomers are characterized by the absolute configuration of their chiral centers and described by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn, Ingold and Prelog. Conventions for stereochemical nomenclature, methods for the determination of stereochemistry and the separation of stereoisomers are well known in the art (e.g., see “Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 5th edition, March, Jerry, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2001).


“Leaving group” means the group with the meaning conventionally associated with it in synthetic organic chemistry, i.e., an atom or group displaceable under reaction (e.g., alkylating) conditions. Examples of leaving groups include, but are not limited to, halo (e.g., F, Cl, Br and I), alkyl (e.g., methyl and ethyl) and sulfonyloxy (e.g., mesyloxy, ethanesulfonyloxy, benzenesulfonyloxy and tosyloxy), thiomethyl, thienyloxy, dihalophosphinoyloxy, tetrahalophosphoxy, benzyloxy, isopropyloxy, acyloxy, and the like.


“Nitro” means the radical —NO2.


“Oxaalkyl” means an alkyl, as defined above, except where one or more of the carbon atoms forming the alkyl chain are replaced with oxygen atoms (—O— or —OR, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent). For example, an oxa(C1-10)alkyl refers to a chain comprising between 1 and 10 carbons and one or more oxygen atoms.


“Oxoalkyl” means an alkyl, as defined above, except where one or more of the carbon atoms forming the alkyl chain are replaced with carbonyl groups (—C(═O)— or —C(═O)—R, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent). The carbonyl group may be an aldehyde, ketone, ester, amide, acid, or acid halide. For example, an oxo(C1-10)alkyl refers to a chain comprising between 1 and 10 carbon atoms and one or more carbonyl groups.


“Oxy” means the radical —O— or —OR, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent. Accordingly, it is noted that the oxy radical may be further substituted with a variety of substituents to form different oxy groups including hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy or carbonyloxy.


“Pharmaceutically acceptable” means that which is useful in preparing a pharmaceutical composition that is generally safe, non-toxic and neither biologically nor otherwise undesirable and includes that which is acceptable for veterinary use as well as human pharmaceutical use.


“Pharmaceutically acceptable salts” means salts of compounds of the present invention which are pharmaceutically acceptable, as defined above, and which possess the desired pharmacological activity. Such salts include acid addition salts formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, heptanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, o-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1,2-ethanedisulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, p-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid, glucoheptonic acid, 4,4′-methylenebis(3-hydroxy-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid), 3-phenylpropionic acid, trimethylacetic acid, tertiary butylacetic acid, lauryl sulfuric acid, gluconic acid, glutamic acid, hydroxynaphthoic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, muconic acid and the like.


Pharmaceutically acceptable salts also include base addition salts which may be formed when acidic protons present are capable of reacting with inorganic or organic bases. Acceptable inorganic bases include sodium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium hydroxide, aluminum hydroxide and calcium hydroxide. Acceptable organic bases include ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, tromethamine, N-methylglucamine and the like.


“Polycyclic ring” includes bicyclic and multi-cyclic rings. The individual rings comprising the polycyclic ring can be fused, spiro or bridging rings.


“Prodrug” means a compound that is convertible in vivo metabolically into an inhibitor according to the present invention. The prodrug itself may or may not also have activity with respect to a given target protein. For example, a compound comprising a hydroxy group may be administered as an ester that is converted by hydrolysis in vivo to the hydroxy compound. Suitable esters that may be converted in vivo into hydroxy compounds include acetates, citrates, lactates, phosphates, tartrates, malonates, oxalates, salicylates, propionates, succinates, fumarates, maleates, methylene-bis-b-hydroxynaphthoates, gentisates, isethionates, di-p-toluoyltartrates, methanesulfonates, ethanesulfonates, benzenesulfonates, p-toluenesulfonates, cyclohexylsulfamates, quinates, esters of amino acids, and the like. Similarly, a compound comprising an amine group may be administered as an amide that is converted by hydrolysis in vivo to the amine compound.


“Protected derivatives” means derivatives of inhibitors in which a reactive site or sites are blocked with protecting groups. Protected derivatives are useful in the preparation of inhibitors or in themselves may be active as inhibitors. A comprehensive list of suitable protecting groups can be found in P. G. M. Wuts and T. W. Greene, “Greene's Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, 4th edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2007.


“Ring” and “ring assembly” refers to a continuous link of atoms. The atoms in this continuous link (the ring atoms) may be all carbon atoms (carbocyclyl), or may optionally contain heteroatoms (heterocyclyl). The ring system may be aromatic and non-aromatic, monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic. In addition, for bicyclic and polycyclic systems, the individual rings comprising the polycyclic ring can be fused, spiro or bridging rings.


“Subject” and “patient” includes humans, non-human mammals (e.g., dogs, cats, rabbits, cattle, horses, sheep, goats, swine, deer, and the like) and non-mammals (e.g., birds, and the like).


“Substituted or unsubstituted” means that a given moiety may consist of only hydrogen substituents through available valencies (unsubstituted) or may further comprise one or more non-hydrogen substituents through available valencies (substituted) that are not otherwise specified by the name of the given moiety. For example, isopropyl is an example of an ethylene moiety that is substituted by —CH3. In general, a non-hydrogen substituent may be any substituent that may be bound to an atom of the given moiety that is specified to be substituted. Examples of substituents include, but are not limited to, aldehyde, alicyclic, aliphatic, (C1-10)alkyl, alkylene, alkylidene, amide, amino, aminoalkyl, aromatic, aryl, bicycloalkyl, bicycloaryl, carbamoyl, carbocyclyl, carboxyl, carbonyl group, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylene, ester, halo, heterobicycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylene, heteroaryl, heterobicycloaryl, heterocycloalkyl, oxo, hydroxy, iminoketone, ketone, nitro, oxaalkyl, and oxoalkyl moieties, each of which may optionally also be substituted or unsubstituted. In one particular embodiment, examples of substituents include, but are not limited to, hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)azaalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl, (C9-12)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C3-12)bicycloalkyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl. In addition, the substituent is itself optionally substituted by a further substituent. In one particular embodiment, examples of the further substituent include, but are not limited to, hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)azaalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl, (C9-12)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C3-12)bicycloalkyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl.


“Sulfamoyl,” means the radical —OS(O)2NRR′, wherein R and R′ are each independently hydrogen or further substituents.


“Sulfinyl” means the radical —SO— and/or —SO—R, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent. It is noted that the sulfinyl radical may be further substituted with a variety of substituents to form different sulfinyl groups including sulfinic acids, sulfinamides, sulfinyl esters, and sulfoxides.


“Sulfonamido” means the radical —S(O)2—NR— and/or —S(O)2—NRR′, —NR—S(O)2— and/or —NR—S(O)2R′, wherein each R and R′ are independently hydrogen or a further substituent.


“Sulfonyl” means the radical —SO2— and/or —SO2—R, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent. It is noted that the sulfonyl radical may be further substituted with a variety of substituents to form different sulfonyl groups including sulfonic acids, sulfonamides, sulfonate esters, and sulfones.


“Therapeutically effective amount” means that amount which, when administered to an animal for treating a disease, is sufficient to effect such treatment for the disease.


“Thio” denotes replacement of an oxygen by a sulfur and includes, but is not limited to, —SR, —S— and ═S containing groups.


“Thioalkyl” means an alkyl, as defined above, except where one or more of the carbon atoms forming the alkyl chain are replaced with sulfur atoms (—S— or —S—R, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent). For example, a thio(C1-10)alkyl refers to a chain comprising between 1 and 10 carbons and one or more sulfur atoms.


“Thiocarbonyl” means the radical —C(═S)— and/or —C(═S)—R, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent. It is noted that the thiocarbonyl radical may be further substituted with a variety of substituents to form different thiocarbonyl groups including thioacids, thioamides, thioesters, and thioketones.


“Treatment” or “treating” means any administration of a compound of the present invention and includes:


(1) preventing the disease from occurring in an animal which may be predisposed to the disease but does not yet experience or display the pathology or symptomatology of the disease,


(2) inhibiting the disease in an animal that is experiencing or displaying the pathology or symptomatology of the diseased (i.e., arresting further development of the pathology and/or symptomatology), or


(3) ameliorating the disease in an animal that is experiencing or displaying the pathology or symptomatology of the diseased (i.e., reversing the pathology and/or symptomatology).


It is noted in regard to all of the definitions provided herein that the definitions should be interpreted as being open ended in the sense that further substituents beyond those specified may be included. Hence, a C1 alkyl indicates that there is one carbon atom but does not indicate what are the substituents on the carbon atom. Hence, a (C1)alkyl comprises methyl (i.e., —CH3) as well as —CRR′R″ where R, R′, and R″ may each independently be hydrogen or a further substituent where the atom attached to the carbon is a heteroatom or cyano. Hence, CF3, CH2OH and CH2CN, for example, are all (C1)alkyls. Similarly, terms such as alkylamino and the like comprise dialkylamino and the like.


A compound having a formula that is represented with a dashed bond is intended to include the formulae optionally having zero, one or more double bonds, as exemplified and shown below:




embedded image


In addition, atoms making up the compounds of the present invention are intended to include all isotopic forms of such atoms. Isotopes, as used herein, include those atoms having the same atomic number but different mass numbers. By way of general example and without limitation, isotopes of hydrogen include tritium and deuterium, and isotopes of carbon include 13C and 14C.


DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to compounds that may be used to inhibit the enzyme ASK1. The present invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions, kits and articles of manufacture comprising such compounds. In addition, the present invention relates to methods and intermediates useful for making the compounds. Further, the present invention relates to methods of using said compounds.


It is noted that the compounds of the present invention may also possess activity for other members of the same protein family and thus may be used to address disease states associated with these other family members.


Compounds of the Invention


In one of its aspects, the present invention relates to compounds that are useful as ASK1 inhibitors.


In one embodiment, ASK1 inhibitors of the present invention are compounds consisting the formula:




embedded image


wherein


Na denotes a nitrogen atom;


ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-11)aryl, (C7-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C1-11)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 substituents, where said 1-5 substituents of ring A are each independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, oxo, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted;


X is selected from the group consisting of CR3 and N;


R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted, or R1 and R2 are taken together to form a (C3-6)cycloalkyl;


R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (C1-6)alkoxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, sulfonyl, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, hetero(C1-6)alkyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-6)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, hetero(C1-5)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, (C3-6)alicyclyl, and hetero(C1-5)alicyclyl, each substituted or unsubstituted; and


R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C3-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each substituted or unsubstituted;


provided that


when X is N and ring A is a heteroalicyclyl, R1 and R2 are not both hydrogen;


when X is CH, ring A is a five-membered heteroaryl, and one of R1 and R2 is hydrogen, the other one of R1 and R2 is not an unsubstituted or substituted (C1-4)alkyl; and


when X is CH, ring A is as defined above, and one of R1 and R2 is a carbonyl, the substituent on said carbonyl is selected from the group consisting of carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, and unsubstituted or substituted cyclyl excluding cyclopropyl.


In another embodiment, ASK1 inhibitors of the present invention are compounds consisting of the formula:




embedded image


wherein


Na denotes a nitrogen atom;


ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-11)aryl, (C7-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C1-11)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 substituents, where said 1-5 substituents of ring A are each independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, oxo, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted;


R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted, or R1 and R2 are taken together to form a (C3-6)cycloalkyl;


R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (C1-6)alkoxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, sulfonyl, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, hetero(C1-6)alkyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-6)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, hetero(C1-5)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, (C3-6)alicyclyl, and hetero(C1-5)alicyclyl, each substituted or unsubstituted; and


R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each substituted or unsubstituted;


provided that


when X is CH, ring A is a five-membered heteroaryl, and one of R1 and R2 is hydrogen, the other one of R1 and R2 is not an unsubstituted or substituted (C1-4)alkyl; and


when X is CH, ring A is as defined above, and one of R1 and R2 is a carbonyl, the substituent on said carbonyl is selected from the group consisting of carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, and unsubstituted or substituted cyclyl excluding cyclopropyl.


In yet another embodiment, the ASK1 inhibitors of the invention are compounds of the formula




embedded image


wherein


Na denotes a nitrogen atom;


ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-11)aryl, (C7-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C1-11)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 substituents, where said 1-5 substituents of ring A are each independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, oxo, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted;


R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted, or R1 and R2 are taken together to form a (C3-6)cycloalkyl;


R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (C1-6)alkoxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, sulfonyl, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, hetero(C1-6)alkyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-6)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, hetero(C1-5)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, (C3-6)alicyclyl, and hetero(C1-5)alicyclyl, each substituted or unsubstituted; and


provided that


when ring A is a heteroalicyclyl, R1 and R2 are not both hydrogen.


R1


The compound according to any one of the above embodiments and variations, in some variations, R1 is selected from the group consisting of (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-3 substituents that are each independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, oxo, thio, oxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.


In some particular variations, R1 is selected from the group consisting of (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with the 1-3 substituents of R1.


In some variation of these particular variations, R1 is selected from the group consisting of furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, phenyl, pyridinyl, pyridonyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, benzimidazolyl, purinyl, naphthalenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinlyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, pyrimidone, imidazolyl, and quinolinyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with the 1-3 substituents of R1. In other variations, R1 is selected from the group consisting of oxazolyl, isoxazolyl and oxadiazolyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with the 1-3 substituents of R1.


In other particular variations, R1 is selected from the group consisting of (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of R1. In some variations of these particular variations, R1 is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, pyridonyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, pyranyl, thiopyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexenyl, and cyclopentenyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with the 1-3 substituents of R1. In still other variations of these particular variations, R1 is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, pyranyl, thiopyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, and cyclohexyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with the 1-3 substituents of R1.


In all the above embodiments and particular variations, the 1-3 substituents of R1 are each independently selected from the group consisting of halo, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, and imino(C1-10)alkyl, each unsubstituted or substituted. In some variations, the 1-3 substituents of R1 are independently selected from the group consisting of (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkoxy, hydroxy, and carbonyloxy.


In all the above embodiments and variations above, in some special variations, R1 is a substituted carbonyl of the formula —C(O)R4, where R4 is as defined below.


In all the above embodiments and variations above, in some other special variations, R1 is a substituted carbonyl of the formula —C(O)-ring B, where ring B is as defined below.


R4


In one special variation, R1 is a substituted carbonyl of the formula —C(O)R4, wherein the compound is of the formula:




embedded image


where


R4 is selected from the group consisting of carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, and aminocarbonyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-3 substituents, each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitro, cyano, thio, mercapto, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, amino, amido, carboxamido, carbamoyl, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, sulfamoyl, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.


In another special variation of the above embodiments and variations, R1 is a substituted carbonyl of the formula —C(O)R4, where the compound is of the formula:




embedded image


where


R4 is selected from the group consisting of carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, and aminocarbonyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-3 substituents, each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitro, cyano, thio, mercapto, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, amino, amido, carboxamido, carbamoyl, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, sulfamoyl, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.


Of the two special variations of the compounds of the invention above, in some variations, the 1-3 substituents of R4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, and hetero(C1-10)aryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.


In other variations, the 1-3 substituents of R4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, hetero(C3-6)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, phenyl(C1-3)alkyl, hetero(C2-5)aryl(C1-3)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl, hetero(C2-5)cycloalkyl, phenyl, and hetero(C2-5)aryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.


In still other variations, the 1-3 substituents of R4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of (C1-6)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl, hetero(C2-5)cycloalkyl, phenyl, and hetero(C2-5)aryl.


Ring B


In one particularly special variation of the above embodiments and variations, R1 is a substituted carbonyl of the formula —C(O)-ring B, where the compound is of the formula:




embedded image


where


ring B is selected from the group consisting of (C4-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-3 substituents,


where

    • each of said 1-3 substituents of ring B is independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, thio, mercapto, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, amido, carboxamido, carbamoyl, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, sulfamoyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.


In another particularly special variation of the above embodiments and variations, R1 is a substituted carbonyl of the formula —C(O)-ring B, where the compound is of the formula:




embedded image


where


ring B is selected from the group consisting of (C4-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-3 substituents,


where

    • each of said 1-3 substituents of ring B is independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, cyano, thio, mercapto, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, amido, carboxamido, carbamoyl, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, sulfamoyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfinyl(C1-10)alkyl, aza(C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)oxaalkyl, (C1-10)oxoalkyl, imino(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C8-12)bicycloaryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, hetero(C1-10)aryl, (C9-12)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-12)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.


The compounds of the above two particularly special variations, ring B is selected from the group consisting of (C4-12)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-12)alicyclyl, (C8-12)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C3-11)bicycloalicyclyl, (C4-6)aryl, hetero(C1-6)aryl, (C8-10)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C1-10)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B.


In some variations, ring B is a five-membered heteroaryl containing up to four heteroatoms, where each of said four heteroatoms is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, and where the heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B. In some particular variations, ring B is selected from the group consisting of furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, and thiadiazolyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B. In other particular variations, ring B is selected from the group consisting of a thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, furanyl, and theinyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B. In more particular variations, ring B is a thienyl, unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B.


In other variations, ring B is a six-membered aryl or heteroaryl, where the heteroaryl contains up to four nitrogen atoms, and where the aryl or heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B. In some particular variations, ring B is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, and triazinyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B. In more particular variations, ring B is a phenyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents. In other more particular variations, ring B is a pyridinyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B.


In the variations that ring B is a six membered aryl, or a five or six membered heteroaryl, in some variations, when present, the 1-3 substituents of ring B are independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, oxy, hydroxy, (C1-6)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, aza(C1-6)alkyl, oxa(C1-6)alkyl, oxo(C1-6)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-6)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, aryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C3-7)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-7)alicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, and hetero(C1-10)aryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.


In other variations, when present, the 1-3 substituents of ring B are each independently selected from the group consisting of halo, hydroxyl, nitro, thio, cyano, (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C2-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkoxy, hydroxyl(C1-6)alkyl, mercapto, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfamoyl, amino, amido, carboxyamido, carbamoyl, carbonyl and carbonyloxy, each unsubstituted or substituted.


In still other variations, when present, the 1-3 substituents of ring B are independently selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C2-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, —C(CH3)(OH)CF3, (C1-6)alkoxy, halo, cyano,




embedded image


where


k is 1, 2, 3, or 4; and


R21, in some variation is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (C1-4)alkyl, (C2-4)alkenyl, (C2-4)alkynyl, halo(C1-4)alkyl, alkyloxy, —(CH2)nOH, —CF3, —(CH2)nCN, —(CH2)nCOOH, —(CH2)nCONH2, —(CH2)nheteroaryl, and —(CH2)nO(CH2)nheteroaryl, where n is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. In other variations, R21 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, perflurormethyl, hydroxyl(C1-4)alkyl, hydroxyl, and cyano(C1-4)alkyl.


The compounds of the above two particularly special variations, ring B is an unsubstituted or substituted phenyl consisting of the formula




embedded image


where


R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, hydroxyl, nitro, cyano, thio, (C1-6)alkyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkoxy, hydroxyl(C1-6)alkyl, mercapto, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfamoyl, amino, amido, carboxyamido, carbamoyl, carbonyl and carboxyl, each unsubstituted or substituted; provided that at least two of R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are hydrogen.


In some variations, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, (C1-6)alkyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, —C(CH3)(OH)CF3, (C1-6)alkoxy, halo, cyano,




embedded image


where


k is 1, 2, 3, or 4; and


R21 is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (C1-4)alkyl, halo(C1-4)alkyl, alkyloxy, —(CH2)nOH, —CF3, —(CH2)nCN, —(CH2)nCOOH, —(CH2)nCONH2, —(CH2)nheteroaryl, and —(CH2)nO(CH2)nheteroaryl, where n is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; or from the group consisting of methyl, perfluoromethyl, hydroxyl, hydroxyl(C1-4)alkyl, and cyano(C1-4)alkyl; or R21 is hydroxyl; or R21 is hydroxylmethyl; or R21 is methyl; or R21 is perfluoromethyl.


In some variations of the above embodiment, R9 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, t-butyl, —C(CH3)(OH)CF3, —C(CH2OH)(CH3)2; —C(OH)(CH3)2, and R7, R8, R10, and R11 are each hydrogen. In other variations, R9 is t-butyl. In still other variations, R9 is —C(OH)(CH3)2. In yet still other variations, R9 is —C(CH3)(OH)CF3. In other further variations, R9 is —C(CH2OH)(CH3)2.


The compounds of the above two particularly special variations, in some variations, ring B is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image


In other variations, ring B is




embedded image


In other variations, ring B is




embedded image


In other variations, ring B is




embedded image


Ring A


The compound according to any one of the above embodiments and variations, in some variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C5-7)alicyclyl, hetero(C1-6)alicyclyl, (C8-11)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C4-10)bicycloalicyclyl, (C6)aryl, hetero(C1-5)aryl, (C8-10)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-10)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A,


where


the hetero(C1-6)alicyclyl, hetero(C4-10)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C1-5)aryl, and hetero(C4-10)bicycloaryl each contains 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur; and


each (C8-11)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C4-10)bicycloalicyclyl, (C8-10)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-10)bicycloaryl consists of a first ring fused to a second ring, where the first ring attaches directly to the ring containing Na, and where the second ring is selected from a group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyls.


In some particular variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C6)aryl, hetero(C2-5)aryl, (C10)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C5-10)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A,


wherein


the hetero(C2-5)aryl is a six-membered heteroaryl;


the (C9-10)bicycloaryl comprises a first ring that is a phenyl, and a second ring that is a five membered heteroaryl or a phenyl;


the hetero(C5-10)bicycloaryl comprises a first ring that is a six-membered heteroaryl, and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, five-membered heteraryl and six-membered heteraryl;


each hetero(C2-5)aryl and hetero(C5-10)bicycloaryl contains 1-4 heteroatoms each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.


In some variations of the above particular variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A.


In other variations of the above particular variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A.


In other particular variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of hetero(C1-4)aryl and hetero(C4-9)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A,


where


the hetero(C1-4)aryl is a five-membered heteroaryl,


the hetero(C4-9)bicycloaryl comprises of a first ring that is a five-membered heteroaryl, and a second ring that is selected from the group of phenyl, and five, six and seven membered heteroaryl; and


each hetero(C1-4)aryl and hetero(C4-9)bicycloaryl contains 1-4 heteroatoms each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.


In some variations of the above particular variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A. In other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A.


In still other particular variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C6)alicyclyl, hetero(C1-5)alicyclyl, (C9-11)bicycloalicyclyl, and hetero(C5-10)bicycloalicyclyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A,


wherein


the hetero(C1-5)alicyclyl is a six-membered heteroalicyclyl;


the (C9-11)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a six-membered alicyclyl, and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyl;


the hetero(C5-10)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a six-membered heteroalicyclyl, and a second ring that is a five, six or seven membered cyclyl;


each hetero(C1-5)alicyclyl and hetero(C5-10)bicycloalicyclyl contains 1-4 heteroatoms, each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.


In some variations of the above particular variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A. In other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A. In other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A. In other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A.


In yet still other particular variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C5)alicyclyl, hetero(C1-4) alicyclyl, (C8-10)bicycloalicyclyl, and hetero(C4-9)bicycloalicyclyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A,


wherein


the hetero(C1-4)alicyclyl is a five-membered heteroalicyclyl,


the (C8-10)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a five-membered alicyclyl, and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyl;


the hetero(C4-9)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a five-membered heterocycloalicyclyl, and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyl; and


each hetero(C1-4)alicyclyl and hetero(C4-9)bicycloalicyclyl contains 1-4 heteroatoms, each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.


In some variations of the above particular variations, ring A is of the formula




embedded image



unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A.


In still other particular variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C7)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-6)alicyclyl, (C10-11)bicycloalicyclyl, and hetero(C6-10)bicycloalicyclyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A,


wherein


the hetero(C3-6)alicyclyl is a seven-membered heterocycloalkyl;


the (C10-11)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a seven-membered alicyclyl, and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyl;


the hetero(C6-10)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a seven-membered heteroalicyclyl and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyl; and


each hetero(C3-6)alicyclyl and hetero(C6-10)bicycloalicyclyl contains 1-4 heteroatoms, each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.


In some variation of the above particular variations, ring A is of the formula




embedded image



unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A.


In all the above embodiments and variations of the compounds of the invention, the 1-5 substituents of ring A are each independently selected from the group consisting of halo, cyano, hydroxy, oxy, oxo, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclic, hetero(C3-12)alicyclic, (C4-12)aryl, and hetero(C1-10)aryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.


In some variations, the 1-5 substituents of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, oxo, halo, cyano, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonylamino, (C1-6)alkylaminocarbonyl, (C1-6)alkoxy, amino, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkoxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxylcarbonyl, and (C1-6)alkylsulfonyl, each unsubstituted or substituted.


In some other variations, the 1-5 substituents of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, fluoro, chloro, cyano, oxo, methoxy, methyl, ethyl, hydroxymethyl, perfluoromethyl, methoxymethyl, methylcarbonylamino, methylaminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyl, methylcarbonyl, hydroxycarbonyl, and methylsulfonyl.


The compound according to any one of the above embodiments and variations, in some variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image


In other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image


In other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image


In still other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image


In yet still other variations, ring A is of the formula




embedded image


In yet still other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image


R2


The compounds according to any one of the above embodiments and variations, in some variations, R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (C1-6)alkyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, hetero(C1-5)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl, and hetero(C1-5)cycloalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted.


In some other variations, R2 is (C1-6)alkyl.


In other variations, R2 is (C3-6)cycloalkyl.


In still other variations, R2 is methyl.


In still other variations, R2 is hydrogen.


R3


The compounds according to any one of the above embodiments and variations, in some variations, R3, when present, is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, amino, thio, oxy, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)cycloalkyl, and (C1-6)alkoxy, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-2 substituents each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, halo, halo(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl, hetero(C1-5)cycloalkyl, phenyl, and hetero(C1-5)aryl.


In some other variations, R3 when present is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, and methoxy.


In yet other variations, R3 when present is selected is cyclopropyl.


In yet other variations, R3 when present is selected is methyl.


In yet other variations, R3 when present is selected is hydrogen.


In another embodiment, the compounds of the invention is of the formula




embedded image


wherein


ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C5-7)alicyclic, hetero(C1-6)alicyclic, (C8-11)bicycloalicyclic, and hetero(C4-10)bicycloalicyclic, (C6)aryl, hetero(C1-5)aryl, (C8-10)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-10)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 substituents that are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, oxo, halo, cyano, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonylamino, (C1-6)alkylaminocarbonyl, (C1-6)alkoxy, amino, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkoxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxylcarbonyl, and (C1-6)alkylsulfonyl, each unsubstituted or substituted;


R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, and methoxy; and


R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, (C1-6)alkyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, —C(CH3)(OH)CF3, (C1-6)alkoxy, halo, cyano,




embedded image


where

    • k is 1, 2, 3, or 4; and
    • R21 is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (C1-4)alkyl, halo(C1-4)alkyl, alkyloxy, —(CH2)nOH, —CF3, —(CH2)nCN, —(CH2)nCOOH, —(CH2)nCONH2, —(CH2)nheteroaryl, and —(CH2)nO(CH2)nheteroaryl, where n is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.


In some variations of the above embodiment, R3 is hydrogen.


In some variations of the above embodiment and variations, R9 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, t-butyl, —C(CH3)(OH)CF3, —C(OH)(CH3)2, and —C(CH2OH)(CH3)2; and R7, R8, R10, and R11 are each hydrogen. In some other variations, R9 is —C(OH)(CH3)2, and R7, R8, R10 and R11 are each hydrogen. In still other variations, R9 is —C(CH2OH)(CH3)2; and R7, R8, R10, and R11 are each hydrogen.


In some variations of the above embodiment and variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A.


In other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A.


In still other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image



each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A.


In some variations of each of the above embodiments and variations of the invention, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image


In other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image


embedded image


Particular examples of compounds according to the present invention include, but are not limited to, the following:

  • N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-cyclopropylbenzamide;
  • N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)nicotinamide;
  • N-(5-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-tert-butylbenzamide;
  • 4-tert-butyl-N-(5-(pyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-tert-butylbenzamide;
  • N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(3,5-dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-acetylbenzamide;
  • N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1,1,1-trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • methyl 4-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-ylcarbamoyl)benzoate;
  • 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(2-ethyl-1H-imidazol-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • methyl 4-(5-(3-ethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-carbamoyl)benzoate;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methylpyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-(methylcarbamoyl)phenyl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-methoxypyrimidin-5-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(6-acetamidopyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(pyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(2-fluoropyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(6-aminopyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(6-hydroxypyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(pyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(6-hydroxypyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • (R)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-hydroxypyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-morpholinothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(piperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-oxopiperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(2-chloropyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-methoxypyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(piperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(4-(hydroxymethyl)piperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(6,7-dihydro-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-5(4H)-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(5-oxo-1,4-diazepan-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-methoxypiperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • (S)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(4-acetylpiperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • (R)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(3-cyanopiperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • N-(5-(4-hydroxypiperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • (S)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide;
  • (R)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-oxo-3,4,7,8-tetrahydropyrido[4,3-d]pyrimidin-6(5H)-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;
  • (S)—N-(5-(2-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • (S)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid;
  • (R)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid;
  • N-(5-(3-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-(methylsulfonyl)piperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide; and
  • 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(1,1-dioxothiomorpholino)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide.


It is noted that the compounds of the present invention may be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, biohydrolyzable ester, biohydrolyzable amide, biohydrolyzable carbamate, solvate, hydrate or prodrug thereof. For example, the compound optionally comprises a substituent that is convertible in vivo to a different substituent such as hydrogen.


It is further noted that the compound may be present as a mixture of stereoisomers, or the compound may present as a single stereoisomer.


In another of its aspects, there is provided a pharmaceutical composition comprising as an active ingredient a compound according to any one of the above embodiments and variations. In one particular variation, the composition is a solid formulation adapted for oral administration. In another particular variation, the composition is a liquid formulation adapted for oral administration. In yet another particular variation, the composition is a tablet. In still another particular variation, the composition is a liquid formulation adapted for parenteral administration.


The present invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound according to any one of the above embodiments and variations, wherein the composition is adapted for administration by a route selected from the group consisting of orally, parenterally, intraperitoneally, intravenously, intraarterially, transdermally, sublingually, intramuscularly, rectally, transbuccally, intranasally, liposomally, via inhalation, vaginally, intraoccularly, via local delivery (for example by catheter or stent), subcutaneously, intraadiposally, intraarticularly, and intrathecally.


In yet another of its aspects, there is provided a kit comprising a compound of any one of the above embodiments and variations; and instructions which comprise one or more forms of information selected from the group consisting of indicating a disease state for which the composition is to be administered, storage information for the composition, dosing information and instructions regarding how to administer the composition. In one particular variation, the kit comprises the compound in a multiple dose form.


In still another of its aspects, there is provided an article of manufacture comprising a compound of any one of the above embodiments and variations; and packaging materials. In one variation, the packaging material comprises a container for housing the compound. In one particular variation, the container comprises a label indicating one or more members of the group consisting of a disease state for which the compound is to be administered, storage information, dosing information and/or instructions regarding how to administer the compound. In another variation, the article of manufacture comprises the compound in a multiple dose form.


In a further of its aspects, there is provided a therapeutic method comprising administering a compound of any one of the above embodiments and variations to a subject.


In another of its aspects, there is provided a method of inhibiting ASK1 comprising contacting ASK1 with a compound of any one of the above embodiments and variations.


In yet another of its aspects, there is provided a method of inhibiting ASK1 comprising causing a compound of any one of the above embodiments and variations to be present in a subject in order to inhibit ASK1 in vivo.


In a further of its aspects, there is provided a method of inhibiting ASK1 comprising administering a first compound to a subject that is converted in vivo to a second compound wherein the second compound inhibits ASK1 in vivo, the second compound being a compound according to any one of the above embodiments and variations.


In another of its aspects, there is provided a method of treating a disease state for which ASK1 possesses activity that contributes to the pathology and/or symptomology of the disease state, the method comprising causing a compound of any one of the above embodiments and variations to be present in a subject in a therapeutically effective amount for the disease state.


In yet another of its aspects, there is provided a method of treating a disease state for which ASK1 possesses activity that contributes to the pathology and/or symptomology of the disease state, the method comprising administering a compound of any one of the above embodiments and variations to a subject, wherein the compound is present in the subject in a therapeutically effective amount for the disease state.


In a further of its aspects, there is provided a method of treating a disease state for which ASK1 possesses activity that contributes to the pathology and/or symptomology of the disease state, the method comprising administering a first compound to a subject that is converted in vivo to a second compound wherein the second compound inhibits ASK1 in vivo, the second compound being a compound according to any one of the above embodiments and variations.


In some variations of each of the above treatment methods, the disease state is selected from the group consisting of metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, neurodegenerative diseases, autoimmune diseases, destructive bone disorders, infectious diseases, diseases and conditions that are mediated by inducible pro-inflammatory proteins, reperfusion/ischemia in stroke, cardiac hypertrophy, respiratory diseases, heart attacks, myocardial ischemia, organ hypoxia, vascular hyperplasia, cardiac hypertrophy, hepatic ischemia, liver disease, congestive heart failure, pathologic immune responses, thrombin-induced platelet aggregation, gastroenterological diseases, hematological diseases, and urological diseases.


In some other variations of each of the above treatment methods, the disease state is selected from the group consisting of the disease state is selected from the group consisting of diabetes, type 2 diabetes mellitus, diabetic dyslipidemia, impaired glucose tolerance (IGT), impaired fasting plasma glucose (IFG), metabolic acidosis, ketosis, appetite regulation, obesity and complications associated with diabetes including diabetic neuropathy, diabetic retinopathy, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, chemotherapy-induced enteritis, oral mucositis, Shortened Bowel Syndrome, kidney disease, hyperlipidemia, arteriosclerosis; hypertension; myocardial infarction, angina pectoris, cerebral infarction, cerebral apoplexy and metabolic syndrome.


In some other variations of each of the above treatment methods, the disease state is selected from the group consisting of acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, asthma, allergies, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and adult respiratory distress syndrome.


In still some other variations of each of the above treatment methods, the disease state is selected from the group consisting of Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), epilepsy, seizures, Huntington's disease, polyglutamine diseases, traumatic brain injury, ischemic and hemorrhaging stroke, cerebral ischemias or neurodegenerative disease, including apoptosis-driven neurodegenerative disease, caused by traumatic injury, acute hypoxia, ischemia or glutamate neurotoxicity.


In still other variations of each of the above treatment methods, the disease state is selected from the group consisting of glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, scleroderma, chronic thyroiditis, Graves' disease, autoimmune gastritis, diabetes, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, autoimmune neutropenia, thrombocytopenia, atopic dermatitis, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, multiple sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, psoriasis, graft vs. host disease, multiple sclerosis, or Sjoegren's syndrome.


In still other variations of each of the above treatment methods, the disease state is selected from the group consisting of osteoporosis, osteoarthritis and multiple myeloma-related bone disorder.


In yet still other variations of each of the above treatment methods, the disease state is selected from the group consisting of sepsis, septic shock, and Shigellosis.


In yet still other variations of each of the above treatment methods, the disease state is selected from the group consisting of edema, analgesia, fever and pain, such as neuromuscular pain, headache, cancer pain, dental pain and arthritis pain.


In yet still other variations of each of the above treatment methods, the disease state is selected from the group consisting of ischemia/reperfusion in stroke, heart attacks, myocardial ischemia, organ hypoxia, vascular hyperplasia, cardiac hypertrophy, hepatic ischemia, liver disease, congestive heart failure, pathologic immune responses such as that caused by T cell activation and thrombin-induced platelet aggregation.


Another aspect of the invention is directed to process for the preparation of the inhibitor of the invention. In one embodiment, the process comprises coupling an intermediate compound of the formula




embedded image



to a compound of the formula




embedded image



under conditions that yield a product of the formula




embedded image



wherein


ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C5-7)alicyclyl, hetero(C1-6)alicyclyl, (C8-11)bicycloalicyclyl, and hetero(C4-10)bicycloalicyclyl, (C6)aryl, hetero(C1-5)aryl, (C8-10)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-10)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-5 substituents that are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, oxo, halo, cyano, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonylamino, (C1-6)alkylaminocarbonyl, (C1-6)alkoxy, amino, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkoxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxylcarbonyl, and (C1-6)alkylsulfonyl, each unsubstituted or substituted;


R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, and methoxy; and


R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, (C1-6)alkyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, —C(CH3)(OH)CF3, (C1-6)alkoxy, halo, cyano,




embedded image


where

    • k is 1, 2, 3, or 4; and
    • R21 is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (C1-4)alkyl, halo(C1-4)alkyl, alkyloxy, —(CH2)nOH, —CF3, —(CH2)nCN, —(CH2)nCOOH, —(CH2)nCONH2, —(CH2)nheteroaryl, and —(CH2)nO(CH2)nheteroaryl, where n is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.


In some variations, the process further comprises coupling a compound of the formula




embedded image



to a compound of the formula




embedded image



under condition that yield the intermediate compound described above.


In some variations of the process of the invention, R3 is hydrogen. In other variations, R3 is methyl.


In the above embodiment of the process of the invention, in some variations, R9 is —C(OH)(CH3)2, and R7, R8, R10, and R11 are each hydrogen. In other variations, R9 is —C(CH2OH)(CH3)2; and R7, R8, R10, and R11 are each hydrogen.


In the above embodiment of the process of the invention, in some variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image


In other variations, ring A is selected from the group consisting of




embedded image


embedded image



Salts, Hydrates, and Prodrugs of ASK1 Inhibitors


It should be recognized that the compounds of the present invention may be present and optionally administered in the form of salts, hydrates and prodrugs that are converted in vivo into the compounds of the present invention. For example, it is within the scope of the present invention to convert the compounds of the present invention into and use them in the form of their pharmaceutically acceptable salts derived from various organic and inorganic acids and bases in accordance with procedures well known in the art.


When the compounds of the present invention possess a free base form, the compounds can be prepared as a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt by reacting the free base form of the compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic acid, e.g., hydrohalides such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide; other mineral acids and their corresponding salts such as sulfate, nitrate, phosphate, etc.; and alkyl and monoarylsulfonates such as ethanesulfonate, toluenesulfonate and benzenesulfonate; and other organic acids and their corresponding salts such as acetate, tartrate, maleate, succinate, citrate, benzoate, salicylate and ascorbate. Further acid addition salts of the present invention include, but are not limited to: adipate, alginate, arginate, aspartate, bisulfate, bisulfite, bromide, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, caprylate, chloride, chlorobenzoate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dihydrogenphosphate, dinitrobenzoate, dodecylsulfate, fumarate, galacterate (from mucic acid), galacturonate, glucoheptonate, gluconate, glutamate, glycerophosphate, hemisuccinate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hippurate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonate, iodide, isethionate, iso-butyrate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, malonate, mandelate, metaphosphate, methanesulfonate, methylbenzoate, monohydrogenphosphate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oxalate, oleate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, phenylacetate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, phosphonate and phthalate. It should be recognized that the free base forms will typically differ from their respective salt forms somewhat in physical properties such as solubility in polar solvents, but otherwise the salts are equivalent to their respective free base forms for the purposes of the present invention.


When the compounds of the present invention possess a free acid form, a pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salt can be prepared by reacting the free acid form of the compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic base. Examples of such bases are alkali metal hydroxides including potassium, sodium and lithium hydroxides; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as barium and calcium hydroxides; alkali metal alkoxides, e.g., potassium ethanolate and sodium propanolate; and various organic bases such as ammonium hydroxide, piperidine, diethanolamine and N-methylglutamine. Also included are the aluminum salts of the compounds of the present invention. Further base salts of the present invention include, but are not limited to: copper, ferric, ferrous, lithium, magnesium, manganic, manganous, potassium, sodium and zinc salts. Organic base salts include, but are not limited to, salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, substituted amines including naturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines and basic ion exchange resins, e.g., arginine, betaine, caffeine, chloroprocaine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine (benzathine), dicyclohexylamine, diethanolamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine, hydrabamine, iso-propylamine, lidocaine, lysine, meglumine, N-methyl-D-glucamine, morpholine, piperazine, piperidine, polyamine resins, procaine, purines, theobromine, triethanolamine, triethylamine, trimethylamine, tripropylamine and tris-(hydroxymethyl)-methylamine(tromethamine). It should be recognized that the free acid forms will typically differ from their respective salt forms somewhat in physical properties such as solubility in polar solvents, but otherwise the salts are equivalent to their respective free acid forms for the purposes of the present invention.


Compounds of the present invention that comprise basic nitrogen containing groups may be quaternized with such agents as (C1-4) alkyl halides, e.g., methyl, ethyl, iso-propyl and tert-butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides; di (C1-4) alkyl sulfates, e.g., dimethyl, diethyl and diamyl sulfates; (C10-18) alkyl halides, e.g., decyl, dodecyl, lauryl, myristyl and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides; and aryl (C1-4) alkyl halides, e.g., benzyl chloride and phenethyl bromide. Such salts permit the preparation of both water-soluble and oil-soluble compounds of the present invention.


N-oxides of compounds according to the present invention can be prepared by methods known to those of ordinary skill in the art. For example, N-oxides can be prepared by treating an unoxidized form of the compound with an oxidizing agent (e.g., trifluoroperacetic acid, permaleic acid, perbenzoic acid, peracetic acid, meta-chloroperoxybenzoic acid, or the like) in a suitable inert organic solvent (e.g., a halogenated hydrocarbon such as dichloromethane) at approximately 0° C. Alternatively, the N-oxides of the compounds can be prepared from the N-oxide of an appropriate starting material.


Prodrug derivatives of compounds according to the present invention can be prepared by modifying substituents of compounds of the present invention that are then converted in vivo to a different substituent. It is noted that in many instances, the prodrugs themselves also fall within the scope of the range of compounds according to the present invention. For example, prodrugs can be prepared by reacting a compound with a carbamylating agent (e.g., 1,1-acyloxyalkylcarbonochloridate, para-nitrophenyl carbonate, or the like) or an acylating agent. Further examples of methods of making prodrugs are described in Saulnier et al. (1994), Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters, Vol. 4, p. 1985.


Protected derivatives of compounds of the present invention can also be made. Examples of techniques applicable to the creation of protecting groups and their removal can be found in P. G. M. Wuts and T. W. Greene in “Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis” 4th edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2007.


Compounds of the present invention may also be conveniently prepared, or formed during the process of the invention, as solvates (e.g., hydrates). Hydrates of compounds of the present invention may be conveniently prepared by recrystallization from an aqueous/organic solvent mixture, using organic solvents such as dioxin, tetrahydrofuran or methanol.


A “pharmaceutically acceptable salt”, as used herein, is intended to encompass any compound according to the present invention that is utilized in the form of a salt thereof, especially where the salt confers on the compound improved pharmacokinetic properties as compared to the free form of compound or a different salt form of the compound. The pharmaceutically acceptable salt form may also initially confer desirable pharmacokinetic properties on the compound that it did not previously possess, and may even positively affect the pharmacodynamics of the compound with respect to its therapeutic activity in the body. An example of a pharmacokinetic property that may be favorably affected is the manner in which the compound is transported across cell membranes, which in turn may directly and positively affect the absorption, distribution, biotransformation and excretion of the compound. While the route of administration of the pharmaceutical composition is important, and various anatomical, physiological and pathological factors can critically affect bioavailability, the solubility of the compound is usually dependent upon the character of the particular salt form thereof, which it utilized. One of skill in the art will appreciate that an aqueous solution of the compound will provide the most rapid absorption of the compound into the body of a subject being treated, while lipid solutions and suspensions, as well as solid dosage forms, will result in less rapid absorption of the compound.


Uses for the Compounds of the Invention


ASK1 activates the p38 and JNK pro-apoptotic pathways in response to environmental stresses. Wang et al. J. Biol. Chem. 1996, 271, 31607-31611; Ichijo et al. Science 1997, 275, 90-94. ASK1 induces apoptosis through ASK1-p38/JNK cascades in response to pro-apoptotic stresses (e.g. oxidative stress and TNF) and pathogenic stresses (e.g. ER stress, GPCR- and Aβ-induced ROS production). Overexpression of wild-type or constitutively active ASK1 induces apoptosis in various cells through mitochondria-dependent caspase activation. Saitoh et al EMBO J. 1998, 17:2596-2606; Kanamoto et al. Mol. Cell Biol. 2000, 20, 196-204; Hatai et al. J. Biol. Chem. 2000, 275, 26576-2658.


Apoptosis plays an essential role in normal development and tissue homeostasis; such that when dysregulated, it contributes to multiple diseases including, but are not limited to, amyloidosis, hypercholesterolemia, diabetes mellitus, cancers, inflammatory diseases, autoimmune diseases, destructive bone disorders, infectious diseases, neurodegenerative diseases, reperfusion/ischemia in stroke, cardiac hypertrophy respiratory diseases, metabolic diseases, gastroenterological diseases, hematological diseases, and urological diseases. Thompson, Science 1995, 267, 1456-1462; Yuan and Yanker Nature 2000, 407, 802-809; Los et al. Immunity 1999, 10, 629-639; Aridor and Balch, Nat. Med. 1999, 5, 745-751; Kopito and Ron, Nat. Cell Biol. 2000, 2, E207-E209; Nakagawa et al. Nature 2000, 403, 98-103; Imai et al. Cell 2001, 105, 891-902; Harding et al. Mol Cell 2001, 7, 1153-1163; and Nishitoh et al. Genes Dev. 2002, 16, 1345-1355.


Recent studies revealed that ASK1 contributes not only to regulation of cell death but also has diverse functions in the decision of cell fate such as cytokine responses, cell differentiation, and innate immune responses. Matsukawa et al. J. Biochem. (Toyko) 2004, 136, 261-265. Sayama et al. J. Biol. Chem. 2000, 276:999-1004; Takeda et al. J. Biol. Chem. 2000, 275:9805-9813; Sagasti et al. Cell 2001, 105:221-232; Kim at al. Science 2002, 297:623-626; Nishitoh et al. Genes Dev. 2002, 16:1345-1355; Matsukawa et al. Nat Immunol 2005, 6, 587-592; Tobiume et al. EMBO Rep. 2001, 2:222-228; Imoto, et al. Diabetes 2006, 55:1197-1204. Constitutively active ASK1 induces neurite outgrowth in PC12 cells. ASK1 is activated by CaMKII, which activates ASK1-p38 pathway in neurons, suggesting that ASK1 might play critical roles in synaptic plasticity. Moreover, TRAF6-ASK1-p38 pathway plays an essential role in inflammatory and innate immune responses. Hayakaw et al. Microbes and Infection 2006, 8, 1098-1107. It has also been demonstrated that ASK1 has a role in the pathogenesis of TNF-α-induced insulin resistance. Overexpression of wild-type ASK1 increases serine phosphorylation of insulin receptor substrate (IRS)-1, and decreases insulin-stimulated tyrosine phosphorylation of IRS-1, leading to impair insulin signaling. Imoto, et al. Diabetes 2006, 55:1197-1204.


Accordingly, modulating the activity of ASK1 by the compounds of the invention would have impact of a multiple of diseases and condition; in particularly, metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, neurodegenerative diseases, autoimmune diseases, destructive bone disorders, infectious diseases, diseases and conditions that are mediated by inducible pro-inflammatory proteins, reperfusion/ischemia in stroke, cardiac hypertrophy, respiratory diseases, heart attacks, myocardial ischemia, organ hypoxia, vascular hyperplasia, cardiac hypertrophy, hepatic ischemia, liver disease, congestive heart failure, pathologic immune responses, thrombin-induced platelet aggregation, gastroenterological diseases, hematological diseases, and urological diseases.


Metabolic diseases which may be treated or prevented by the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, diabetes, particularly, type 2 diabetes mellitus, diabetic dislipidemia, impaired glucose tolerance (IGT), impaired fasting plasma glucose (IFG), metabolic acidosis, ketosis, appetite regulation, obesity and complications associated with diabetes including diabetic neuropathy, diabetic retinopathy, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, chemotherapy-induced enteritis, oral mucositis, Shortened Bowel Syndrome and kidney disease. The conditions mediated by ASK1 inhibitors of the invention further include hyperlipidemia such as hypertriglyceridemia, hypercholesteremia, hypoHDLemia and postprandial hyperlipidemia; arteriosclerosis; hypertension; myocardial infarction, angina pectoris, cerebral infarction, cerebral apoplexy and metabolic syndrome.


Inflammatory diseases which may be treated or prevented by the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, asthma, allergies, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, adult respiratory distress syndrome.


Neurodegenerative diseases which may be treated or prevented by the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, Alzheimer's disease (Nakagawa et al. Nature 2000, 403, 98-103), Parkinson's disease (Imai et al. Cell 2001, 105, 891-902), amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), epilepsy, seizures, Huntington's disease, polyglutamine diseases (Nishitoh et al. Genes Dev. 2002, 16, 1345-1355), traumatic brain injury, ischemic and hemorrhaging stroke, cerebral ischemias or neurodegenerative disease, including apoptosis-driven neurodegenerative disease, caused by traumatic injury, acute hypoxia, ischemia or glutamate neurotoxicity.


Autoimmune diseases which may be treated or prevented by the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, scleroderma, chronic thyroiditis, Graves' disease, autoimmune gastritis, diabetes, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, autoimmune neutropenia, thrombocytopenia, atopic dermatitis, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, multiple sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, psoriasis, graft vs. host disease, multiple sclerosis, or Sjoegren's syndrome.


Destructive bone disorders which may be treated or prevented by the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, osteoporosis, osteoarthritis and multiple myeloma-related bone disorder.


Infectious diseases which may be treated or prevented by the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, sepsis, septic shock, and Shigellosis.


Diseases and conditions that are mediated by inducible pro-inflammatory proteins which may be treated or prevented by the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, edema, analgesia, fever and pain, such as neuromuscular pain, headache, cancer pain, dental pain and arthritis pain.


Other conditions that are mediated by ASK1 and may be treated or prevented by the compounds of this invention include, but are not limited to, ischemia/reperfusion in stroke, heart attacks, myocardial ischemia, organ hypoxia, vascular hyperplasia, cardiac hypertrophy, hepatic ischemia, liver disease, congestive heart failure, pathologic immune responses such as that caused by T cell activation, and thrombin-induced platelet aggregation.


Combination Therapy


A wide variety of therapeutic agents may have a therapeutic additive or synergistic effect with ASK1 inhibitors according to the present invention. Combination therapies that comprise one or more compounds of the present invention with one or more other therapeutic agents can be used, for example, to: 1) enhance the therapeutic effect(s) of the one or more compounds of the present invention and/or the one or more other therapeutic agents; 2) reduce the side effects exhibited by the one or more compounds of the present invention and/or the one or more other therapeutic agents; and/or 3) reduce the effective dose of the one or more compounds of the present invention and/or the one or more other therapeutic agents. It is noted that combination therapy is intended to cover when agents are administered before or after each other (sequential therapy) as well as when the agents are administered at the same time.


The present invention particularly relates to the use of the compounds of the invention in combination with one or more other antidiabetic agents. Examples of such other antidiabetic agents include, but are not limited to insulin signaling pathway modulators, like protein tyrosine phosphatase (PTPase) inhibitors, and glutamine-fructose-6-phosphate amidotransferase (GFAT) inhibitors; compounds influencing a dysregulated hepatic glucose production, like glucose-6-phosphatase (G6Pase) inhibitors, fructose-1,6-bisphosphatase (F-1,6-BPase) inhibitors, glycogen phosphorylase (GP) inhibitors, glucagon receptor antagonists and phosphoenolpyruvate carboxykinase (PEPCK) inhibitors; pyruvate dehydrogenase kinase (PDHK) inhibitors; insulin sensitivity enhancers (insulin sensitizers); insulin secretion enhancers (insulin secretagogues); alpha-glucosidase inhibitors; inhibitors of gastric emptying; glucokinase activators, GLP-1 receptor agonists, GLP-2 receptor agonists, UCP modulators, RXR modulators, GSK-3 inhibitors, PPAR modulators, metformin, insulin; and U2-adrenergic antagonists. ASK1 inhibitors may be administered with such at least one other antidiabetic compound either simultaneously as a single dose, at the same time as separate doses, or sequentially (i.e., where one is administered before or after the other is administered).


Examples of PTPase inhibitors that may be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention include, but are not limited to those disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,057,316, 6,001,867, and PCT Publication Nos. WO 99/58518, WO 99/58522, WO 99/46268, WO 99/46267, WO 99/46244, WO 99/46237, WO 99/46236, and WO 99/15529.


Examples of GFAT inhibitors that may be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention include, but are not limited to those disclosed in Mol. Cell. Endocrinol. 1997, 135(1), 67-77.


Examples of G6Pase inhibitors that may be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention include, but are not limited to those disclosed in PCT Publication Nos. WO 00/14090, WO 99/40062 and WO 98/40385, European Patent Publication No. EP682024 and Diabetes 1998, 47, 1630-1636.


Examples of F-1,6-BPase inhibitors that may be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention include, but are not limited to those disclosed in PCT Publication Nos. WO 00/14095, WO 99/47549, WO 98/39344, WO 98/39343 and WO 98/39342.


Examples of GP inhibitors that may be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention include, but are not limited to those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,998,463, PCT Publication Nos. WO 99/26659, WO 97/31901, WO 96/39384 and WO9639385 and European Patent Publication Nos. EP 978279 and EP 846464.


Examples of glucagon receptor antagonists that may be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention include, but are not limited to those disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,880,139 and 5,776,954, PCT Publication Nos. WO 99/01423, WO 98/22109, WO 98/22108, WO 98/21957, WO 97/16442 and WO 98/04528 and those described in Bioorg Med. Chem. Lett 1992, 2, 915-918, J. Med. Chem. 1998, 41, 5150-5157, and J. Biol Chem. 1999, 274, 8694-8697.


Examples of PEPCK inhibitors that may be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention include, but are not limited to those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,030,837 and Mol. Biol. Diabetes 1994, 2, 283-99.


Examples of PDHK inhibitors that may be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention include, but are not limited to those disclosed in J. Med. Chem. 1999, 42, 2741-2746.


Examples of insulin sensitivity enhancers that may be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention include, but are not limited to GSK-3 inhibitors, retinoid X receptor (RXR) agonists, Beta-3 AR agonists, UCP modulators, antidiabetic thiazolidinediones (glitazones), non-glitazone type PPAR gamma agonists, dual PPAR gamma/PPAR alpha agonists, antidiabetic vanadium containing compounds and biguanides such as metformin.


Examples of GSK-3 inhibitors include, but are not limited to those disclosed in PCT Publication Nos. WO 00/21927 and WO 97/41854.


Examples of RXR modulators include, but are not limited to those disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,981,784, 5,071,773, 5,298,429 and 5,506,102 and PCT Publication Nos. WO89/05355, WO91/06677, WO92/05447, WO93/11235, WO95/18380, WO94/23068, and WO93/23431.


Examples of Beta-3 AR agonists include, but are not limited to CL-316,243 (Lederle Laboratories) and those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,705,515 and PCT Publication Nos. WO 99/29672, WO 98/32753, WO 98/20005, WO 98/09625, WO 97/46556, and WO 97/37646.


Examples of UCP modulators include agonists of UCP-1, UCP-2 and UCP-3. Examples of UCP modulators include, but are not limited to those disclosed in Vidal-Puig et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 1997, 235(1), 79-82.


Examples of antidiabetic, PPAR modulating thiazolidinediones (glitazones) include, but are not limited to, (S)-((3,4-dihydro-2-(phenyl-methyl)-2H-1-benzopyran-6-yl)methyl-thiazolidine-2,4-dione(englitazone), 5-{[4-(3-(5-methyl-2-phenyl-4-oxazolyl)-1-oxo-propyl)-phenyl]-methyl}-thiazolidine-2,4-dione(darglitazone), 5-{[4-(1-methyl-cyclohexyl)methoxy)-phenyl]methyl]-thiazolidine-2,4-dione(ciglitazone), 5-{[4-(2-(1-indolyl)ethoxy)phenyl]methyl}-thiazolidine-2,4-dione (DRF2189), 5-{4-[2-(5-methyl-2-phenyl-4-oxazoly)-ethoxy)]benzyl}-thiazolidine-2,4-dione (BM-13.1246), 5-(2-naphthylsulfonyl)-thiazolidine-2,4-dione (AY-31637), bis{4-[(2,4-dioxo-5-thiazolidinyl)-methyl]phenyl}methane (YM268), 5-{4-[2-(5-methyl-2-phenyl-4-oxazolyl)-2-hydroxyethoxy]-benzyl}-thiazolidine-2,4-dione (AD-5075), 5-[4-(1-phenyl-1-cyclopropanecarbonylamino)-benzyl]-thiazolidine-2,4-dione (DN-108) 5-{[4-(2-(2,3-dihydroindol-1-yl)ethoxy)phenylmethyl)-thiazolidine-2,4-dione, 5-[3-(4-chloro-phenyl])-2-propynyl]-5-phenylsulfonyl)thiazolidine-2,4-dione, 5-[3-(4-chlorophenyl])-2-propynyl]-5-(4-fluorophenyl-sulfonyl)thiazolidine-2,4-dione, 5-{[4-(2-(methyl-2-pyridinyl-amino)-ethoxy)phenyl]methyl}-thiazolidine-2,4-dione(rosiglitazone), 5-{[4-(2-(5-ethyl-2-pyridyl)ethoxy)phenyl]-methyl}-thiazolidine-2,4-dione (pioglitazone; marketed under the trademark ACTOS™), 5-[6-(2-fluoro-benzyloxy)-naphthalen-2-ylmethyl]-thiazolidine-2,4-dione (MCC555), 5-([2-(2-naphthyl)-benzoxazol-5-yl]-methyl}thiazolidine-2,4-dione (T-174), edaglitazone (BM-13-1258), rivoglitazone (CS-011), and 5-(2,4-dioxothiazolidin-5-ylmethyl)-2-methoxy-N-(4-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)benzamide (KRP297).


Examples of non-glitazone type PPAR gamma agonists include, but are not limited to N-(2-benzoylphenyl)-L-tyrosine analogues, such as GI-262570, reglixane (JTT501), and FK-614 and metaglidasen (MBX-102).


Examples of dual PPAR gamma/PPAR alpha agonists include, but are not limited to omega.-[(oxoquinazolinylalkoxy)phenyl]alkanoates and analogs thereof including those described in PCT Publication No. WO 99/08501 and Diabetes 2000, 49(5), 759-767; tesaglitazar, muraglitazar and naveglitazar.


Examples of antidiabetic vanadium containing compounds include, but are not limited to those disclosed in the U.S. Pat. No. 5,866,563.


Metformin (dimethyldiguanide) and its hydrochloride salt is marketed under the trademark GLUCOPHAGE™.


Examples of insulin secretion enhancers include but are not limited to glucagon receptor antagonists (as described above), sulphonyl urea derivatives, incretin hormones or mimics thereof, especially glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) or GLP-1 agonists, beta-cell imidazoline receptor antagonists, and short-acting insulin secretagogues, like antidiabetic phenylacetic acid derivatives, antidiabetic D-phenylalanine derivatives, and mitiglinide and pharmaceutical acceptable salts thereof.


Examples of sulphonyl urea derivatives include, but are not limited to, glisoxepid, glyburide, glibenclamide, acetohexamide, chloropropamide, glibornuride, tolbutamide, tolazamide, glipizide, carbutamide, gliquidone, glyhexamide, phenbutamide, tolcyclamide; glimepiride and gliclazide. Tolbutamide, glibenclamide, gliclazide, glibornuride, gliquidone, glisoxepid and glimepiride can be administered in the form that they are marketed under the trademarks RASTINON HOECHST™, AZUGLUCON™, DIAMICRONT™, GLUBORID™, GLURENORM™, PRO-DIABAN™ and AMARYL™, respectively.


Examples of GLP-1 agonists include, but are not limited to those disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,120,712, 5,118,666 and 5,512,549, and PCT Publication No. WO 91/11457. In particular, GLP-1 agonists include those compounds like GLP-1 (7-37) in which compound the carboxy-terminal amide functionality of Arg36 is displaced with Gly at the 37th position of the GLP-1 (7-36)NH2 molecule and variants and analogs thereof including GLN9-GLP-1 (7-37), D-GLN9-GLP-1 (7-37), acetyl LYS9-GLP-1 (7-37), LYS18-GLP-1 (7-37) and, in particular, GLP-1 (7-37)OH, VAL8-GLP-1 (7-37), GLY8-GLP-1(7-37), THR8-GLP-1 (7-37), GLP-1 (7-37) and 4-imidazopropionyl-GLP-1.


One particular example of a GLP-1 agonist is Exendatide, a 39-amino acid peptide amide, which is marketed under the trademark BYETTA™. Extendatide has the empirical formula C184H282N50O60S and molecular weight of 4186.6 Daltons. The amino acid sequence for Extendatide is as follows: H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Pro-Ser-NH2.


Examples of glucagon-like peptide-2 (GLP-2) or GLP-2 agonists include, but are not limited to those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 7,056,886 and PCT Publication Nos. WO 00/53208, WO 01/49314 and WO 03/099854. One particular example of a GLP-2 agonist is TEDUGLUTIDE™, a 39-amino acid peptide amide (NPS Pharmaceuticals, Inc.).


Examples of beta-cell imidazoline receptor antagonists include, but are not limited to those described in PCT Publication No. WO 00/78726 and J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 1996, 278, 82-89.


An example of an antidiabetic phenylacetic acid derivative is repaglinide and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.


Examples of antidiabetic D-phenylalanine derivatives include, but are not limited to nateglinide (N-[(trans4-isopropylcyclohexyl)-carbonyl]-D-phenylalanine, EP 196222 and EP 526171) and repaglinide ((S)-2-ethoxy-4-{2-[[3-methy-1-1-[2-(1-piperidinyl)phenyl]buytl]-amino]-2-oxoethyl}benzoic acid, EP 0 147 850 A2 and EP 0 207 331 A1). Nateglinide is intended to include the particular crystal forms (polymorphs) disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,488,510 and European Patent Publication No. EP 0526171 B1. Repaglinide and nateglinide may be administered in the form as they are marketed under the trademarks NOVONORM™ and STARLIX™, respectively.


Examples of alpha-Glucosidase inhibitors include, but are not limited to, acarbose, N-(1,3-dihydroxy-2-propyl)valiolamine (voglibose) and the 1-deoxynojirimycin derivative miglitol. Acarbose is 4″,6″-dideoxy-4′-[(1S)-(1,4,6/5)-4,5,6-trihydroxy-3-hydroxymethyl-2-cyclo-hexenylamino)maltotriose. The structure of acarbose can as well be described as O-4,6-dideoxy-4-{[1S,4R,5S,6S]-4,5,6-trihydroxy-3-(hydroxymethyl)-2-cyclohexen-1-yl]-amino)-alpha-D-glucopyranosyl-(1-4)-O-alpha-D-glucopyranosyl-(1-4)-D-glucopyranose. (U.S. Pat. No. 4,062,950 and European Patent Publication No. EP 0 226 121). Acarbose and miglitol may be administered in the forms that they are marketed under the trademarks GLUCOBAY™ and DIASTABOL 50™ respectively.


Examples of inhibitors of gastric emptying other than GLP-1 include, but are not limited to those disclosed in J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 2000, 85(3), 1043-1048, and Diabetes Care 1998, 21, 897-893, especially Amylin and analogs thereof such as pramlintide. Amylin is described in Diabetologia, 1996, 39, 492-499.


Examples of α2-adrenergic antagonists include, but are not limited to midaglizole which is described in Diabetes 1987, 36, 216-220. The insulin that may be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention include, but are not limited to animal insulin preparations extracted from the pancreas of bovine and pig; human insulin preparations genetically synthesized using Escherichia coli or yeast; zinc insulin; protamine zinc insulin; fragment or derivative of insulin (e.g., INS-1) and an oral insulin preparation.


In one particular embodiment, the antidiabetic compound administered in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention is selected from the group consisting of nateglinide, mitiglinide, repaglinide, metformin, extendatide, rosiglitazone, tesaglitazar, pioglitazone, glisoxepid, glyburide, glibenclamide, acetohexamide, chloropropamide, glibornuride, tolbutamide, tolazamide, glipizide, carbutamide, gliquidone, glyhexamide, phenbutamide, tolcyclamide, glimepiride and gliclazide, including any pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.


Examples of the preparation and formulation of PTPase inhibitors, GSK-3 inhibitors, non-small molecule mimetic compounds, GFAT inhibitors, G6Pase inhibitors, glucagon receptor antagonists, PEPCK inhibitors, F-1,6-BPase inhibitors, GP inhibitors, RXR modulators, Beta-3 AR agonists, PDHK inhibitors, inhibitors of gastric emptying and UCP modulators are disclosed in the patents, applications and references provided herein.


In the case of combination therapy with Compound I, the other antidiabetic compound may be administered (e.g., route and dosage form) in a manner known per se for such compound. ASK1 inhibitors of the invention and the other antidiabetic compound may be administered sequentially (i.e., at separate times) or at the same time, either one after the other separately in two separate dose forms or in one combined, single dose form. In one particular embodiment, the other antidiabetic compound is administered with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention as a single, combined dosage form. The dose of the antidiabetic compound may be selected from the range known to be clinically employed for such compound. Any therapeutic compounds of diabetic complications, antihyperlipemic compounds, antiobestic compounds or antihypertensive compounds can be used in combination with ASK1 inhibitors of the invention in the same manner as the above antidiabetic compounds. Examples of therapeutic compounds of diabetic complications include, but are not limited to, aldose reductase inhibitors such as tolrestat, epalrestat, zenarestat, zopolrestat, minalrestat, fidarestat, CT-112 and ranirestat; neurotrophic factors and increasing compounds thereof such as NGF, NT-3, BDNF and neurotrophin production-secretion promoters described in WO01/14372 (e.g., 4-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-(2-methyl-1-imidazolyl)-5-[3-(2-methylphenoxy)propyl]oxazole); neuranagenesis stimulators such as Y-128; PKC inhibitors such as ruboxistaurin mesylate; AGE inhibitors such as ALT946, pimagedine, N-phenacylthiazolium bromide (ALT766), ALT-711, EXO-226, pyridorin and pyridoxamine; reactive oxygen scavengers such as thioctic acid; cerebral vasodilators such as tiapride and mexiletine; somatostatin receptor agonists such as BIM23190; and apoptosis signal regulating kinase-1 (ASK-1) inhibitors. Examples of antihyperlipemic compounds include, but are not limited to, HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors such as pravastatin, simvastatin, lovastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin, rosuvastatin and pitavastatin; squalene synthase inhibitors such as compounds described in WO97/10224 (e.g., N-[[(3R,5S)-1-(3-acetoxy-2,2-dimethylpropyl)-7-chloro-5-(2,3-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxo-1,2,3,5-tetrahydro-4,1-benzoxazepin-3-yl]acetyl]-piperidine-4-acetic acid); fibrate compounds such as bezafibrate, clofibrate, simfibrate and clinofibrate; ACAT inhibitors such as avasimibe and eflucimibe; anion exchange resins such as colestyramine; probucol; nicotinic acid drugs such as nicomol and niceritrol; ethyl icosapentate; and plant sterols such as soysterol and γ-oryzanol. Examples of antiobestic compounds include, but are not limited to, dexfenfluramine, fenfluramine, phentermine, sibutramine, amfepramone, dexamphetamine, mazindol, phenylpropanolamine, clobenzorex; MCH receptor antagonists such as SB-568849 and SNAP-7941; neuropeptide Y antagonists such as CP-422935; cannabinoid receptor antagonists such as SR-141716 and SR-147778; ghrelin antagonist; 11β-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors such as BVT-3498; pancreatic lipase inhibitors such as orlistat and ATL-962; Beta-3 AR agonists such as AJ-9677; peptidic anorexiants such as leptin and CNTF (Ciliary Neurotropic Factor); cholecystokinin agonists such as lintitript and FPL-15849; and feeding deterrent such as P-57. Examples of the antihypertensive compounds include angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors such as captopril, enalapril and delapril; angiotensin II antagonists such as candesartan cilexetil, losartan, eprosartan, valsartan, telmisartan, irbesartan, olmesartan medoxomil, tasosartan and 1-[[2′-(2,5-dihydro-5-oxo-4H-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)biphenyl-4-yl]methyl]-2-ethoxy-1H-benzimidazole-7-carboxylic acid; calcium channel blockers such as manidipine, nifedipine, nicardipine, amlodipine and efonidipine; potassium channel openers such as levcromakalim, L-27152, AL0671 and NIP-121; and clonidine.


The structure of the active agents identified herein by code nos., generic or trade names may be taken from the actual edition of the standard compendium “The Merck Index” or from databases, e.g. Patents International (e.g. IMS World Publications). The corresponding content thereof is hereby incorporated by reference. Any person skilled in the art is fully enabled to identify the active agents and, based on these references, likewise enabled to manufacture and test the pharmaceutical indications and properties in standard test models, both in vitro and in vivo.


Compositions Comprising ASK1 Inhibitors


A wide variety of compositions and administration methods may be used in conjunction with the compounds of the present invention. Such compositions may include, in addition to the compounds of the present invention, conventional pharmaceutical excipients, and other conventional, pharmaceutically inactive agents. Additionally, the compositions may include active agents in addition to the compounds of the present invention. These additional active agents may include additional compounds according to the invention, and/or one or more other pharmaceutically active agents.


The compositions may be in gaseous, liquid, semi-liquid or solid form, formulated in a manner suitable for the route of administration to be used. For oral administration, capsules and tablets are typically used. For parenteral administration, reconstitution of a lyophilized powder, prepared as described herein, is typically used.


Compositions comprising compounds of the present invention may be administered or coadministered orally, parenterally, intraperitoneally, intravenously, intraarterially, transdermally, sublingually, intramuscularly, rectally, transbuccally, intranasally, liposomally, via inhalation, vaginally, intraoccularly, via local delivery (for example by catheter or stent), subcutaneously, intraadiposally, intraarticularly, or intrathecally. The compounds and/or compositions according to the invention may also be administered or coadministered in slow release dosage forms.


The ASK1 inhibitors and compositions comprising them may be administered or coadministered in any conventional dosage form. Co-administration in the context of this invention is intended to mean the administration of more than one therapeutic agent, one of which includes an ASK1 inhibitor, in the course of a coordinated treatment to achieve an improved clinical outcome. Such co-administration may also be coextensive, that is, occurring during overlapping periods of time.


Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, subcutaneous, or topical application may optionally include one or more of the following components: a sterile diluent, such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oil, polyethylene glycol, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvent; antimicrobial agents, such as benzyl alcohol and methyl parabens; antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid and sodium bisulfite; chelating agents, such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA); buffers, such as acetates, citrates and phosphates; agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose, and agents for adjusting the acidity or alkalinity of the composition, such as alkaline or acidifying agents or buffers like carbonates, bicarbonates, phosphates, hydrochloric acid, and organic acids like acetic and citric acid. Parenteral preparations may optionally be enclosed in ampules, disposable syringes or single or multiple dose vials made of glass, plastic or other suitable material.


When compounds according to the present invention exhibit insufficient solubility, methods for solubilizing the compounds may be used. Such methods are known to those of skill in this art, and include, but are not limited to, using cosolvents, such as dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), using surfactants, such as TWEEN, or dissolution in aqueous sodium bicarbonate. Derivatives of the compounds, such as prodrugs of the compounds may also be used in formulating effective pharmaceutical compositions.


Upon mixing or adding compounds according to the present invention to a composition, a solution, suspension, emulsion or the like may be formed. The form of the resulting composition will depend upon a number of factors, including the intended mode of administration, and the solubility of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle. The effective concentration needed to ameliorate the disease being treated may be empirically determined.


Compositions according to the present invention are optionally provided for administration to humans and animals in unit dosage forms, such as tablets, capsules, pills, powders, dry powders for inhalers, granules, sterile parenteral solutions or suspensions, and oral solutions or suspensions, and oil-water emulsions containing suitable quantities of the compounds, particularly the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, preferably the sodium salts, thereof. The pharmaceutically therapeutically active compounds and derivatives thereof are typically formulated and administered in unit-dosage forms or multiple-dosage forms. Unit-dose forms, as used herein, refers to physically discrete units suitable for human and animal subjects and packaged individually as is known in the art. Each unit-dose contains a predetermined quantity of the therapeutically active compound sufficient to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier, vehicle or diluent. Examples of unit-dose forms include ampoules and syringes individually packaged tablet or capsule. Unit-dose forms may be administered in fractions or multiples thereof. A multiple-dose form is a plurality of identical unit-dosage forms packaged in a single container to be administered in segregated unit-dose form. Examples of multiple-dose forms include vials, bottles of tablets or capsules or bottles of pint or gallons. Hence, multiple dose form is a multiple of unit-doses that are not segregated in packaging.


In addition to one or more compounds according to the present invention, the composition may comprise: a diluent such as lactose, sucrose, dicalcium phosphate, or carboxymethylcellulose; a lubricant, such as magnesium stearate, calcium stearate and talc; and a binder such as starch, natural gums, such as gum acaciagelatin, glucose, molasses, polyvinylpyrrolidine, celluloses and derivatives thereof, povidone, crospovidones and other such binders known to those of skill in the art. Liquid pharmaceutically administrable compositions can, for example, be prepared by dissolving, dispersing, or otherwise mixing an active compound as defined above and optional pharmaceutical adjuvants in a carrier, such as, for example, water, saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, glycols, ethanol, and the like, to form a solution or suspension. If desired, the pharmaceutical composition to be administered may also contain minor amounts of auxiliary substances such as wetting agents, emulsifying agents, or solubilizing agents, pH buffering agents and the like, for example, acetate, sodium citrate, cyclodextrine derivatives, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine sodium acetate, triethanolamine oleate, and other such agents. Actual methods of preparing such dosage forms are known in the art, or will be apparent, to those skilled in this art; for example, see Remington: The Science and Practices of Pharmacy, Lippincott Williams, and Wilkins Publisher, 21st edition, 2005. The composition or formulation to be administered will, in any event, contain a sufficient quantity of an inhibitor of the present invention to reduce ASK1 activity in vivo, thereby treating the disease state of the subject.


Dosage forms or compositions may optionally comprise one or more compounds according to the present invention in the range of 0.005% to 100% (weight/weight) with the balance comprising additional substances such as those described herein. For oral administration, a pharmaceutically acceptable composition may optionally comprise any one or more commonly employed excipients, such as, for example pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, talcum, cellulose derivatives, sodium crosscarmellose, glucose, sucrose, magnesium carbonate, sodium saccharin, talcum. Such compositions include solutions, suspensions, tablets, capsules, powders, dry powders for inhalers and sustained release formulations, such as, but not limited to, implants and microencapsulated delivery systems, and biodegradable, biocompatible polymers, such as collagen, ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, polyorthoesters, polylactic acid and others. Methods for preparing these formulations are known to those skilled in the art. The compositions may optionally contain 0.01%-100% (weight/weight) of one or more ASK1 inhibitors, optionally 0.1-95%, and optionally 1-95%.


Salts, preferably sodium salts, of the inhibitors may be prepared with carriers that protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as time release formulations or coatings. The formulations may further include other active compounds to obtain desired combinations of properties.


A. Formulations for Oral Administration


Oral pharmaceutical dosage forms may be as a solid, gel or liquid. Examples of solid dosage forms include, but are not limited to tablets, capsules, granules, and bulk powders. More specific examples of oral tablets include compressed, chewable lozenges and tablets that may be enteric-coated, sugar-coated or film-coated. Examples of capsules include hard or soft gelatin capsules. Granules and powders may be provided in non-effervescent or effervescent forms. Each may be combined with other ingredients known to those skilled in the art.


In certain embodiments, compounds according to the present invention are provided as solid dosage forms, preferably capsules or tablets. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like may optionally contain one or more of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder; a diluent; a disintegrating agent; a lubricant; a glidant; a sweetening agent; and a flavoring agent.


Examples of binders that may be used include, but are not limited to, microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth, glucose solution, acacia mucilage, gelatin solution, sucrose, and starch paste.


Examples of lubricants that may be used include, but are not limited to, talc, starch, magnesium or calcium stearate, lycopodium and stearic acid.


Examples of diluents that may be used include, but are not limited to, lactose, sucrose, starch, kaolin, salt, mannitol, and dicalcium phosphate.


Examples of glidants that may be used include, but are not limited to, colloidal silicon dioxide.


Examples of disintegrating agents that may be used include, but are not limited to, crosscarmellose sodium, sodium starch glycolate, alginic acid, corn starch, potato starch, bentonite, methylcellulose, agar and carboxymethylcellulose.


Examples of coloring agents that may be used include, but are not limited to, any of the approved certified water-soluble FD and C dyes, mixtures thereof, and water insoluble FD and C dyes suspended on alumina hydrate.


Examples of sweetening agents that may be used include, but are not limited to, sucrose, lactose, mannitol and artificial sweetening agents such as sodium cyclamate and saccharin, and any number of spray-dried flavors.


Examples of flavoring agents that may be used include, but are not limited to, natural flavors extracted from plants such as fruits and synthetic blends of compounds that produce a pleasant sensation, such as, but not limited to peppermint and methyl salicylate.


Examples of wetting agents that may be used include, but are not limited to, propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate, and polyoxyethylene lauryl ether.


Examples of anti-emetic coatings that may be used include, but are not limited to, fatty acids, fats, waxes, shellac, ammoniated shellac and cellulose acetate phthalates.


Examples of film coatings that may be used include, but are not limited to, hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyethylene glycol 4000 and cellulose acetate phthalate.


If oral administration is desired, the salt of the compound may optionally be provided in a composition that protects it from the acidic environment of the stomach. For example, the composition can be formulated in an enteric coating that maintains its integrity in the stomach and releases the active compound in the intestine. The composition may also be formulated in combination with an antacid or other such ingredient.


When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it may optionally additionally comprise a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil. In addition, dosage unit forms may optionally additionally comprise various other materials that modify the physical form of the dosage unit, for example, coatings of sugar and other enteric agents.


Compounds according to the present invention may also be administered as a component of an elixir, suspension, syrup, wafer, sprinkle, chewing gum or the like. A syrup may optionally comprise, in addition to the active compounds, sucrose as a sweetening agent and certain preservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors.


The compounds of the present invention may also be mixed with other active materials that do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement the desired action, such as antacids, H2 blockers, and diuretics. For example, if a compound is used for treating asthma or hypertension, it may be used with other bronchodilators and antihypertensive agents, respectively.


Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers that may be included in tablets comprising compounds of the present invention include, but are not limited to binders, lubricants, diluents, disintegrating agents, coloring agents, flavoring agents, and wetting agents. Enteric-coated tablets, because of the enteric-coating, resist the action of stomach acid and dissolve or disintegrate in the neutral or alkaline intestines. Sugar-coated tablets may be compressed tablets to which different layers of pharmaceutically acceptable substances are applied. Film-coated tablets may be compressed tablets that have been coated with polymers or other suitable coating. Multiple compressed tablets may be compressed tablets made by more than one compression cycle utilizing the pharmaceutically acceptable substances previously mentioned. Coloring agents may also be used in tablets. Flavoring and sweetening agents may be used in tablets, and are especially useful in the formation of chewable tablets and lozenges.


Examples of liquid oral dosage forms that may be used include, but are not limited to, aqueous solutions, emulsions, suspensions, solutions and/or suspensions reconstituted from non-effervescent granules and effervescent preparations reconstituted from effervescent granules.


Examples of aqueous solutions that may be used include, but are not limited to, elixirs and syrups. As used herein, elixirs refer to clear, sweetened, hydroalcoholic preparations. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers that may be used in elixirs include, but are not limited to solvents. Particular examples of solvents that may be used include glycerin, sorbitol, ethyl alcohol and syrup. As used herein, syrups refer to concentrated aqueous solutions of a sugar, for example, sucrose. Syrups may optionally further comprise a preservative.


Emulsions refer to two-phase systems in which one liquid is dispersed in the form of small globules throughout another liquid. Emulsions may optionally be oil-in-water or water-in-oil emulsions. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers that may be used in emulsions include, but are not limited to non-aqueous liquids, emulsifying agents and preservatives.


Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable substances that may be used in non-effervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosage form, include diluents, sweeteners and wetting agents.


Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable substances that may be used in effervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosage form, include organic acids and a source of carbon dioxide.


Coloring and flavoring agents may optionally be used in all of the above dosage forms.


Particular examples of preservatives that may be used include glycerin, methyl and propylparaben, benzoic add, sodium benzoate and alcohol.


Particular examples of non-aqueous liquids that may be used in emulsions include mineral oil and cottonseed oil.


Particular examples of emulsifying agents that may be used include gelatin, acacia, tragacanth, bentonite, and surfactants such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate.


Particular examples of suspending agents that may be used include sodium carboxymethylcellulose, pectin, tragacanth, Veegum and acacia. Diluents include lactose and sucrose. Sweetening agents include sucrose, syrups, glycerin and artificial sweetening agents such as sodium cyclamate and saccharin.


Particular examples of wetting agents that may be used include propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate, and polyoxyethylene lauryl ether.


Particular examples of organic acids that may be used include citric and tartaric acid.


Sources of carbon dioxide that may be used in effervescent compositions include sodium bicarbonate and sodium carbonate. Coloring agents include any of the approved certified water soluble FD and C dyes, and mixtures thereof.


Particular examples of flavoring agents that may be used include natural flavors extracted from plants such fruits, and synthetic blends of compounds that produce a pleasant taste sensation.


For a solid dosage form, the solution or suspension, in for example propylene carbonate, vegetable oils or triglycerides, is preferably encapsulated in a gelatin capsule. Such solutions, and the preparation and encapsulation thereof, are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,328,245; 4,409,239; and 4,410,545. For a liquid dosage form, the solution, e.g., for example, in a polyethylene glycol, may be diluted with a sufficient quantity of a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carrier, e.g., water, to be easily measured for administration.


Alternatively, liquid or semi-solid oral formulations may be prepared by dissolving or dispersing the active compound or salt in vegetable oils, glycols, triglycerides, propylene glycol esters (e.g., propylene carbonate) and other such carriers, and encapsulating these solutions or suspensions in hard or soft gelatin capsule shells. Other useful formulations include those set forth in U.S. Pat. Nos. Re 28,819 and 4,358,603.


B. Injectables, Solutions, and Emulsions


The present invention is also directed to compositions designed to administer the compounds of the present invention by parenteral administration, generally characterized by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection. Injectables may be prepared in any conventional form, for example as liquid solutions or suspensions, solid forms suitable for solution or suspension in liquid prior to injection, or as emulsions.


Examples of excipients that may be used in conjunction with injectables according to the present invention include, but are not limited to water, saline, dextrose, glycerol or ethanol. The injectable compositions may also optionally comprise minor amounts of non-toxic auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, and other such agents, such as for example, sodium acetate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate and cyclodextrins. Implantation of a slow-release or sustained-release system, such that a constant level of dosage is maintained (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 3,710,795) is also contemplated herein. The percentage of active compound contained in such parenteral compositions is highly dependent on the specific nature thereof, as well as the activity of the compound and the needs of the subject.


Parenteral administration of the formulations includes intravenous, subcutaneous and intramuscular administrations. Preparations for parenteral administration include sterile solutions ready for injection, sterile dry soluble products, such as the lyophilized powders described herein, ready to be combined with a solvent just prior to use, including hypodermic tablets, sterile suspensions ready for injection, sterile dry insoluble products ready to be combined with a vehicle just prior to use and sterile emulsions. The solutions may be either aqueous or nonaqueous.


When administered intravenously, examples of suitable carriers include, but are not limited to physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS), and solutions containing thickening and solubilizing agents, such as glucose, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixtures thereof.


Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers that may optionally be used in parenteral preparations include, but are not limited to aqueous vehicles, nonaqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents, isotonic agents, buffers, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, emulsifying agents, sequestering or chelating agents and other pharmaceutically acceptable substances.


Examples of aqueous vehicles that may optionally be used include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringers Injection, Isotonic Dextrose Injection, Sterile Water Injection, Dextrose and Lactated Ringers Injection.


Examples of nonaqueous parenteral vehicles that may optionally be used include fixed oils of vegetable origin, cottonseed oil, corn oil, sesame oil and peanut oil.


Antimicrobial agents in bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations may be added to parenteral preparations, particularly when the preparations are packaged in multiple-dose containers and thus designed to be stored and multiple aliquots to be removed. Examples of antimicrobial agents that may be used include phenols or cresols, mercurials, benzyl alcohol, chlorobutanol, methyl and propyl p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters, thimerosal, benzalkonium chloride and benzethonium chloride.


Examples of isotonic agents that may be used include sodium chloride and dextrose. Examples of buffers that may be used include phosphate and citrate. Examples of antioxidants that may be used include sodium bisulfate. Examples of local anesthetics that may be used include procaine hydrochloride. Examples of suspending and dispersing agents that may be used include sodium carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose and polyvinylpyrrolidone. Examples of emulsifying agents that may be used include Polysorbate 80 (TWEEN 80). A sequestering or chelating agent of metal ions includes EDTA.


Pharmaceutical carriers may also optionally include ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol for water miscible vehicles and sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid, citric acid or lactic acid for pH adjustment.


The concentration of an inhibitor in the parenteral formulation may be adjusted so that an injection administers a pharmaceutically effective amount sufficient to produce the desired pharmacological effect. The exact concentration of an inhibitor and/or dosage to be used will ultimately depend on the age, weight and condition of the patient or animal as is known in the art.


Unit-dose parenteral preparations may be packaged in an ampoule, a vial or a syringe with a needle. All preparations for parenteral administration should be sterile, as is known and practiced in the art.


Injectables may be designed for local and systemic administration. Typically a therapeutically effective dosage is formulated to contain a concentration of at least about 0.1% w/w up to about 90% w/w or more, preferably more than 1% w/w of the ASK1 inhibitor to the treated tissue(s). The inhibitor may be administered at once, or may be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at intervals of time. It is understood that the precise dosage and duration of treatment will be a function of the location of where the composition is parenterally administered, the carrier and other variables that may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo or in vitro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations and dosage values may also vary with the age of the individual treated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens may need to be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the formulations. Hence, the concentration ranges set forth herein are intended to be exemplary and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed formulations.


The ASK1 inhibitor may optionally be suspended in micronized or other suitable form or may be derivatized to produce a more soluble active product or to produce a prodrug. The form of the resulting mixture depends upon a number of factors, including the intended mode of administration and the solubility of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle. The effective concentration is sufficient for ameliorating the symptoms of the disease state and may be empirically determined.


C. Lyophilized Powders


The compounds of the present invention may also be prepared as lyophilized powders, which can be reconstituted for administration as solutions, emulsions and other mixtures. The lyophilized powders may also be formulated as solids or gels.


Sterile, lyophilized powder may be prepared by dissolving the compound in a sodium phosphate buffer solution containing dextrose or other suitable excipient. Subsequent sterile filtration of the solution followed by lyophilization under standard conditions known to those of skill in the art provides the desired formulation. Briefly, the lyophilized powder may optionally be prepared by dissolving dextrose, sorbitol, fructose, corn syrup, xylitol, glycerin, glucose, sucrose or other suitable agent, about 1-20%, preferably about 5 to 15%, in a suitable buffer, such as citrate, sodium or potassium phosphate or other such buffer known to those of skill in the art at, typically, about neutral pH. Then, a ASK1 inhibitor is added to the resulting mixture, preferably above room temperature, more preferably at about 30-35° C., and stirred until it dissolves. The resulting mixture is diluted by adding more buffer to a desired concentration. The resulting mixture is sterile filtered or treated to remove particulates and to insure sterility, and apportioned into vials for lyophilization. Each vial may contain a single dosage or multiple dosages of the inhibitor.


D. Formulation for Topical Administration


The compounds of the present invention may also be administered as topical mixtures. Topical mixtures may be used for local and systemic administration. The resulting mixture may be a solution, suspension, emulsions or the like and are formulated as creams, gels, ointments, emulsions, solutions, elixirs, lotions, suspensions, tinctures, pastes, foams, aerosols, irrigations, sprays, suppositories, bandages, dermal patches or any other formulations suitable for topical administration.


The ASK1 inhibitors may be formulated as aerosols for topical application, such as by inhalation (see, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,044,126, 4,414,209, and 4,364,923, which describe aerosols for delivery of a steroid useful for treatment of inflammatory diseases, particularly asthma). These formulations for administration to the respiratory tract can be in the form of an aerosol or solution for a nebulizer, or as a microfine powder for insufflation, alone or in combination with an inert carrier such as lactose. In such a case, the particles of the formulation will typically have diameters of less than 50 microns, preferably less than 10 microns.


The inhibitors may also be formulated for local or topical application, such as for topical application to the skin and mucous membranes, such as in the eye, in the form of gels, creams, and lotions and for application to the eye or for intracisternal or intraspinal application. Topical administration is contemplated for transdermal delivery and also for administration to the eyes or mucosa, or for inhalation therapies. Nasal solutions of the ASK1 inhibitor alone or in combination with other pharmaceutically acceptable excipients can also be administered.


E. Formulations for Other Routes of Administration


Depending upon the disease state being treated, other routes of administration, such as topical application, transdermal patches, and rectal administration, may also be used. For example, pharmaceutical dosage forms for rectal administration are rectal suppositories, capsules and tablets for systemic effect. Rectal suppositories are used herein mean solid bodies for insertion into the rectum that melt or soften at body temperature releasing one or more pharmacologically or therapeutically active ingredients. Pharmaceutically acceptable substances utilized in rectal suppositories are bases or vehicles and agents to raise the melting point. Examples of bases include cocoa butter (theobroma oil), glycerin-gelatin, carbowax, (polyoxyethylene glycol) and appropriate mixtures of mono-, di- and triglycerides of fatty acids. Combinations of the various bases may be used. Agents to raise the melting point of suppositories include spermaceti and wax. Rectal suppositories may be prepared either by the compressed method or by molding. The typical weight of a rectal suppository is about 2 to 3 gm. Tablets and capsules for rectal administration may be manufactured using the same pharmaceutically acceptable substance and by the same methods as for formulations for oral administration.


F. Examples of Formulations


The following are particular examples of oral, intravenous and tablet formulations that may optionally be used with compounds of the present invention. It is noted that these formulations may be varied depending on the particular compound being used and the indication for which the formulation is going to be used.












ORAL FORMULATION



















Compound of the Present Invention
10-100
mg



Citric Acid Monohydrate
105
mg



Sodium Hydroxide
18
mg



Flavoring



Water
q.s. to 100
mL




















INTRAVENOUS FORMULATION



















Compound of the Present Invention
0.1-10
mg










Dextrose Monohydrate
q.s. to make isotonic











Citric Acid Monohydrate
1.05
mg



Sodium Hydroxide
0.18
mg



Water for Injection
q.s. to 1.0
mL




















TABLET FORMULATION


















Compound of the Present Invention
1%



Microcrystalline Cellulose
73%



Stearic Acid
25%



Colloidal Silica
1%.











Dosage, Host and Safety


The compounds of the present invention are stable and can be used safely. In particular, the compounds of the present invention are useful as ASK1 inhibitors for a variety of subjects (e.g., humans, non-human mammals and non-mammals).


The optimal dose may vary depending upon such conditions as, for example, the type of subject, the body weight of the subject, on the severity of the condition, the route of administration, and specific properties of the particular compound being used. Generally, acceptable and effective daily doses are amounts sufficient to effectively slow or eliminate the condition being treated. Typically, the daily dose for oral administration to an adult (body weight of about 60 kg) is about 1 to 1000 mg, about 3 to 300 mg, or about 10 to 200 mg. It will be appreciated that the daily dose can be given in a single administration or in multiple (e.g., 2 or 3) portions a day.


Kits and Articles of Manufacture Comprising ASK1 Inhibitors


The invention is also directed to kits and other articles of manufacture for treating diseases associated with ASK1. It is noted that diseases are intended to cover all conditions for which the ASK1 possess activity that contributes to the pathology and/or symptomology of the condition.


In one embodiment, a kit is provided that comprises a composition comprising at least one inhibitor of the present invention in combination with instructions. The instructions may indicate the disease state for which the composition is to be administered, storage information, dosing information and/or instructions regarding how to administer the composition. The kit may also comprise packaging materials. The packaging material may comprise a container for housing the composition. The kit may also optionally comprise additional components, such as syringes for administration of the composition. The kit may comprise the composition in single or multiple dose forms.


In another embodiment, an article of manufacture is provided that comprises a composition comprising at least one inhibitor of the present invention in combination with packaging materials. The packaging material may comprise a container for housing the composition. The container may optionally comprise a label indicating the disease state for which the composition is to be administered, storage information, dosing information and/or instructions regarding how to administer the composition. The kit may also optionally comprise additional components, such as syringes for administration of the composition. The kit may comprise the composition in single or multiple dose forms.


It is noted that the packaging material used in kits and articles of manufacture according to the present invention may form a plurality of divided containers such as a divided bottle or a divided foil packet. The container can be in any conventional shape or form as known in the art which is made of a pharmaceutically acceptable material, for example a paper or cardboard box, a glass or plastic bottle or jar, a re-sealable bag (for example, to hold a “refill” of tablets for placement into a different container), or a blister pack with individual doses for pressing out of the pack according to a therapeutic schedule. The container that is employed will depend on the exact dosage form involved, for example a conventional cardboard box would not generally be used to hold a liquid suspension. It is feasible that more than one container can be used together in a single package to market a single dosage form. For example, tablets may be contained in a bottle that is in turn contained within a box. Typically the kit includes directions for the administration of the separate components. The kit form is particularly advantageous when the separate components are preferably administered in different dosage forms (e.g., oral, topical, transdermal and parenteral), are administered at different dosage intervals, or when titration of the individual components of the combination is desired by the prescribing physician.


One particular example of a kit according to the present invention is a so-called blister pack. Blister packs are well known in the packaging industry and are being widely used for the packaging of pharmaceutical unit dosage forms (tablets, capsules, and the like). Blister packs generally consist of a sheet of relatively stiff material covered with a foil of a preferably transparent plastic material. During the packaging process recesses are formed in the plastic foil. The recesses have the size and shape of individual tablets or capsules to be packed or may have the size and shape to accommodate multiple tablets and/or capsules to be packed. Next, the tablets or capsules are placed in the recesses accordingly and the sheet of relatively stiff material is sealed against the plastic foil at the face of the foil which is opposite from the direction in which the recesses were formed. As a result, the tablets or capsules are individually sealed or collectively sealed, as desired, in the recesses between the plastic foil and the sheet. Preferably the strength of the sheet is such that the tablets or capsules can be removed from the blister pack by manually applying pressure on the recesses whereby an opening is formed in the sheet at the place of the recess. The tablet or capsule can then be removed via said opening.


Another specific embodiment of a kit is a dispenser designed to dispense the daily doses one at a time in the order of their intended use. Preferably, the dispenser is equipped with a memory-aid, so as to further facilitate compliance with the regimen. An example of such a memory-aid is a mechanical counter that indicates the number of daily doses that has been dispensed. Another example of such a memory-aid is a battery-powered micro-chip memory coupled with a liquid crystal readout, or audible reminder signal which, for example, reads out the date that the last daily dose has been taken and/or reminds one when the next dose is to be taken.


Preparation of ASK1 Inhibitors


Various methods may be developed for synthesizing compounds according to the present invention. Representative methods for synthesizing these compounds are provided in the Examples. It is noted, however, that the compounds of the present invention may also be synthesized by other synthetic routes that others may devise.


Synthetic Schemes for Compounds of the Present Invention


Compounds according to the present invention may be synthesized according to the reaction schemes shown below. Other reaction schemes could be readily devised by those skilled in the art. It should also be appreciated that a variety of different solvents, temperatures and other reaction conditions can be varied to optimize the yields of the reactions.


In the reactions described hereinafter it may be necessary to protect reactive functional groups, for example hydroxy, amino, imino, thio or carboxy groups, where these are desired in the final product, to avoid their unwanted participation in the reactions. Conventional protecting groups may be used in accordance with standard practice, for examples see P. G. M. Wuts and T. W. Greene in “Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis” 4th edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2007.




embedded image


A general synthetic route for producing compounds of the present invention through the routes is shown in Scheme A. When commercially available 6-bromopyridin-3-amine is reacted with potassium thiocyanate and bromine in acetic acid, cyclized product A1 would be obtained. Subsequent reaction of A1 with an appropriate acid chloride in a solvent such as DMA would produce the desired intermediate A2. If the acid chloride is an alkylcarboxy-substituted benzoyl chloride, the respective product of type A3 would be reacted further with excess of a Grignard reagent to give the desired alcohol intermediate A4.




embedded image


Alternatively compounds of the present invention can be prepared through the route shown in Scheme B. Isobutyraldehyde can be α-arylated by ethyl bromobenzoate under Pd-catalyzed conditions. Reduction of the aldehyde by NaBH4 would give the corresponding alcohol B1. Protection of the primary alcohol as the TBS ether followed by saponification would afford acid B3. Coupling of B3 with intermediate A1 (see Scheme A) using a coupling reagent such as TBTU would give intermediate B4. After fluoride-mediated deprotection of the TBS group, the desired intermediate B5 would be obtained.




embedded image


Alternatively compounds of the present invention can be prepared through the route shown in Scheme C. Commercially available carboxy-substituted phenyl ketone C1 can be reacted with oxalyl chloride to give the corresponding acid chloride C2, which is then reacted with intermediate A1 (Scheme A) to give intermediate C3. Subsequent reaction of C3 with TMSCF3 followed by acidic workup would give the desired intermediate C4.




embedded image


As shown in Scheme D, compounds of the present invention can be prepared from intermediates such as A2, described earlier in Schemes A-C. Where ring A is attached to the central scaffold via a carbon atom, palladium catalyzed coupling of a boronic acid or ester D1 would afford the desired compound of type D2. Where ring A is attached via a nitrogen to the central scaffold, a cyclic amine or imine D3 can be reacted at elevated temperatures, with or without copper iodide as a mediator, to give the desired product D4.




embedded image


Alternatively compounds of the present invention can be prepared as shown in Scheme E. As in Scheme D, where ring A is attached to the central scaffold via a carbon atom, palladium catalyzed coupling of intermediate A1 (Scheme A) and a boronic acid or ester D1 (Scheme D) would afford the desired intermediate of type E1; where ring A is attached via a nitrogen to the central scaffold, a cyclic amine or imine D3 (Scheme D) can be reacted with intermediate A1 (Scheme A) at elevated temperatures, with or without copper iodide as a mediator, to give the desired the desired intermediate of type E2. After E1 or E2 is reacted with an acid chloride or with an acid in the presence of a coupling reagent such as EDCI, the desired compounds E3 or E4, respectively, would be obtained.




embedded image


Compounds of the present invention can be prepared as described in Scheme F. Reacting commercially available 2,4-dichloro-5-nitropyrimidine (F1) with potassium isothiocyanate in acetic acid would give intermediate F2. Suzuki coupling of F2 with a boronic acid or ester, or heating of F2 in the presence of a cyclic amine with or without copper(I) iodide, would then produce intermediate of type F3. Reduction of the nitro group, followed by cyclization in situ, would give the precursor F4, which can subsequently be converted to the desired compounds by acylation with an acid chloride, for example.


General Procedures for the Preparation of the Compounds of the Invention


It will be readily recognized that certain compounds according to the present invention have atoms with linkages to other atoms that confer a particular stereochemistry to the compound (e.g., chiral centers). It is recognized that synthesis of compounds according to the present invention may result in the creation of mixtures of different stereoisomers (i.e., enantiomers and diastereomers). Unless a particular stereochemistry is specified, recitation of a compound is intended to encompass all of the different possible stereoisomers.


Compounds according to the present invention can also be prepared as their individual stereoisomers by reacting a racemic mixture of the compound with an optically active resolving agent to form a pair of diastereoisomeric compounds, separating the diastereomers and recovering the optically pure enantiomer. While resolution of enantiomers can be carried out using covalent diastereomeric derivatives of compounds, dissociable complexes are preferred (e.g., crystalline diastereoisomeric salts).


Compounds according to the present invention can also be prepared as a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt by reacting the free base form of the compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic acid. Alternatively, a pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salt of a compound can be prepared by reacting the free acid form of the compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic base. Inorganic and organic acids and bases suitable for the preparation of the pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds are set forth in the definitions section of this Application. Alternatively, the salt forms of the compounds can be prepared using salts of the starting materials or intermediates.


The free acid or free base forms of the compounds can be prepared from the corresponding base addition salt or acid addition salt form. For example, a compound in an acid addition salt form can be converted to the corresponding free base by treating with a suitable base (e.g., ammonium hydroxide solution, sodium hydroxide, and the like). A compound in a base addition salt form can be converted to the corresponding free acid by treating with a suitable acid (e.g., hydrochloric acid, etc).


The N-oxides of compounds according to the present invention can be prepared by methods known to those of ordinary skill in the art. For example, N-oxides can be prepared by treating an unoxidized form of the compound with an oxidizing agent (e.g., trifluoroperacetic acid, permaleic acid, perbenzoic acid, peracetic acid, meta-chloroperoxybenzoic acid, or the like) in a suitable inert organic solvent (e.g., a halogenated hydrocarbon such as dichloromethane) at approximately 0° C. Alternatively, the N-oxides of the compounds can be prepared from the N-oxide of an appropriate starting material.


Compounds in an unoxidized form can be prepared from N-oxides of compounds by treating with a reducing agent (e.g., sulfur, sulfur dioxide, triphenyl phosphine, lithium borohydride, sodium borohydride, phosphorus trichloride, tribromide, or the like) in an suitable inert organic solvent (e.g., acetonitrile, ethanol, aqueous dioxane, or the like) at 0 to 80° C.


Prodrug derivatives of the compounds can be prepared by methods known to those of ordinary skill in the art (e.g., for further details see Saulnier et al. (1994), Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters, Vol. 4, p. 1985). For example, appropriate prodrugs can be prepared by reacting a non-derivatized compound with a suitable carbamylating agent (e.g., 1,1-acyloxyalkylcarbonochloridate, para-nitrophenyl carbonate, or the like).


Protected derivatives of the compounds can be made by methods known to those of ordinary skill in the art. A detailed description of the techniques applicable to the creation of protecting groups and their removal can be found in P. G. M. Wuts and T. W. Greene, “Greene's Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis”, 4th edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2007.


Compounds according to the present invention may be conveniently prepared, or formed during the process of the invention, as solvates (e.g., hydrates). Hydrates of compounds of the present invention may be conveniently prepared by recrystallization from an aqueous/organic solvent mixture, using organic solvents such as dioxin, tetrahydrofuran or methanol.


As used herein the symbols and conventions used in these processes, schemes and examples are consistent with those used in the contemporary scientific literature, for example, the Journal of the American Chemical Society or the Journal of Biological Chemistry. Standard single-letter or three-letter abbreviations are generally used to designate amino acid residues, which are assumed to be in the L-configuration unless otherwise noted. Unless otherwise noted, all starting materials were obtained from commercial suppliers and used without further purification. Specifically, the following abbreviations may be used in the examples and throughout the specification:















μL (microliters)
Ac (acetyl)


atm (atmosphere)
ATP (Adenosine Triphosphatase)


BOC (tert-butyloxycarbonyl)
BOP (bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphinic



chloride)


BSA (Bovine Serum Albumin)
CBZ (benzyloxycarbonyl)


CDI (1,1-carbonyldiimidazole)
DCC (dicyclohexylcarbodiimide)


DCE (dichloroethane)
DCM (dichloromethane)


DMAP (4-dimethylaminopyridine)
DME (1,2-dimethoxyethane)


DMF (N,N-dimethylformamide)
DMPU (N,N′-dimethylpropyleneurea)


DMSO (dimethylsulfoxide)
EDCI (ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride)


EDTA (Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid)
Et (ethyl)


Et2O (diethyl ether)
EtOAc (ethyl acetate)


FMOC (9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl)
g (grams)


h (hours)
HOAc or AcOH (acetic acid)


HOBT (1-hydroxybenzotriazole)
HOSu (N-hydroxysuccinimide)


HPLC (high pressure liquid chromatography)
Hz (Hertz)


i.v. (intravenous)
IBCF (isobutyl chloroformate)


i-PrOH (isopropanol)
L (liters)


M (molar)
mCPBA (meta-chloroperbenzoic acid)


Me (methyl)
MeOH (methanol)


mg (milligrams)
MHz (megahertz)


min (minutes)
mL (milliliters)


mM (millimolar)
mmol (millimoles)


mol (moles)
MOPS (Morpholinepropanesulfonic acid)


mp (melting point)
NaOAc (sodium acetate)


OMe (methoxy)
psi (pounds per square inch)


RP (reverse phase)
r.t. (ambient temperature)


SPA (Scintillation Proximity Assay)
TBAF (tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride)


TBS (t-butyldimethylsilyl)
TBSOTf (t-butyldimethylsilyl



trifluoromethanesulfonate)


TBTU (O-(benzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-
tBu (tert-butyl)


tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate)


TEA (triethylamine)
TFA (trifluoroacetic acid)


TFAA (trifluoroacetic anhydride)
THF (tetrahydrofuran)


TIPS (triisopropylsilyl)
TLC (thin layer chromatography)


TMS (trimethylsilyl)
TMSE (2-(trimethylsilyl)ethyl)


Tr (retention time)
Brij35 (polyoxyethyleneglycol dodecyl ether)









All references to ether or Et2O are to diethyl ether; and brine refers to a saturated aqueous solution of NaCl. Unless otherwise indicated, all temperatures are expressed in ° C. (degrees Centigrade). All reactions are conducted under an inert atmosphere at RT unless otherwise noted.



1H NMR spectra were recorded on a Bruker Avance 400. Chemical shifts are expressed in parts per million (ppm). Coupling constants are in units of Hertz (Hz). Splitting patterns describe apparent multiplicities and are designated as s (singlet), d (doublet), t (triplet), q (quartet), m (multiplet), br (broad).


Low-resolution mass spectra (MS) and compound purity data were acquired on a Waters ZQ LC/MS single quadrupole system equipped with electrospray ionization (ESI) source, UV detector (220 and 254 nm), and evaporative light scattering detector (ELSD). Thin-layer chromatography was performed on 0.25 mm E. Merck silica gel plates (60F-254), visualized with UV light, 5% ethanolic phosphomolybdic acid, Ninhydrin orp-anisaldehyde solution. Flash column chromatography was performed on silica gel (230-400 mesh, Merck).


The starting materials and reagents used in preparing these compounds are either available from commercial suppliers such as the Aldrich Chemical Company (Milwaukee, Wis.), Bachem (Torrance, Calif.), Sigma (St. Louis, Mo.), or may be prepared by methods well known to a person of ordinary skill in the art, following procedures described in such standard references as Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, vols. 1-23, John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y., 2006; Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, vols. 1-5 and supps., Elsevier Science Publishers, 1998; Organic Reactions, vols. 1-68, John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y., 2007; March J.: Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5th ed., 2001, John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y.; and Larock: Comprehensive Organic Transformations, 2nd edition, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1999. The entire disclosures of all documents cited throughout this application are incorporated herein by reference.


Various methods for separating mixtures of different stereoisomers are known in the art. For example, a racemic mixture of a compound may be reacted with an optically active resolving agent to form a pair of diastereoisomeric compounds. The diastereomers may then be separated in order to recover the optically pure enantiomers. Dissociable complexes may also be used to resolve enantiomers (e.g., crystalline diastereoisomeric salts). Diastereomers typically have sufficiently distinct physical properties (e.g., melting points, boiling points, solubilities, reactivity, etc.) and can be readily separated by taking advantage of these dissimilarities. For example, diastereomers can typically be separated by chromatography or by separation/resolution techniques based upon differences in solubility. A more detailed description of techniques that can be used to resolve stereoisomers of compounds from their racemic mixture can be found in Jean Jacques, Andre Collet, and Samuel H. Wilen, Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (1981).


Diastereomers have distinct physical properties (e.g., melting points, boiling points, solubilities, reactivity, etc.) and can be readily separated by taking advantage of these dissimilarities. The diastereomers can be separated by chromatography or, preferably, by separation/resolution techniques based upon differences in solubility. The optically pure enantiomer is then recovered, along with the resolving agent, by any practical means that would not result in racemization. A more detailed description of the techniques applicable to the resolution of stereoisomers of compounds from their racemic mixture can be found in Jean Jacques, Andre Collet, and Samuel H. Wilen, Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (1981).


Chiral components can be separated and purified using any of a variety of techniques known to those skilled in the art. For example, chiral components can be purified using supercritical fluid chromatography (SFC). In one particular variation, chiral analytical SFC/MS analyses are conducted using a Berger analytical SFC system (AutoChem, Newark, Del.) which consists of a Berger SFC dual pump fluid control module with a Berger FCM 1100/1200 supercritical fluid pump and FCM 1200 modifier fluid pump, a Berger TCM 2000 oven, and an Alcott 718 autosampler. The integrated system can be controlled by BI-SFC Chemstation software version 3.4. Detection can be accomplished with a Waters ZQ 2000 detector operated in positive mode with an ESI interface and a scan range from 200-800 Da with 0.5 second per scan. Chromatographic separations can be performed on a ChiralPak AD-H, ChiralPak AS-H, ChiralCel OD-H, or ChiralCel OJ-H column (5μ, 4.6×250 mm; Chiral Technologies, Inc. West Chester, Pa.) with 10 to 40% methanol as the modifier and with or without ammonium acetate (10 mM). Any of a variety of flow rates can be utilized including, for example, 1.5 or 3.5 mL/min with an inlet pressure set at 100 bar. Additionally, a variety of sample injection conditions can be used including, for example, sample injections of either 5 or 10 μL in methanol at 0.1 mg/mL in concentration.


In another variation, preparative chiral separations are performed using a Berger MultiGram II SFC purification system. For example, samples can be loaded onto a ChiralPak AD column (21×250 mm, 10μ). In particular variations, the flow rate for separation can be 70 mL/min, the injection volume up to 2 mL, and the inlet pressure set at 130 bar. Stacked injections can be applied to increase the efficiency.


Descriptions of the syntheses of particular compounds according to the present invention based on the above reaction schemes and variations thereof are set forth in the Example section.


Assaying the Biological Activity of the Compounds of the Invention


The inhibitory effect of the compound of the invention on ASK1 may be evaluated by a variety of binding assays and functional assays.


ASK1 protein for the assay may be prepared by standard PCR cloning and expression in a vector. Example A discloses such a method of preparing the enzyme. However, it should be noted that ASK1 is commercially available through Millipore (Cat. #14-606).


The inhibitory effect of the compound of the invention on ASK1 may be evaluated by evaluating the phosphorylating activity of the enzyme on a known substrate with or without the presence of the test compound. Example B provides such an assay where myelin basic protein (Wako) is used as substrate and detection is by scintillation counting. It should be understood other substrates and detection mechanism may be used. A commercially available a kit, Cisbio's HTRF® KinEASE™ STK kit, has shown to be useful for evaluating ASK1 activity. The assay uses an anti-phosphoseric specific, Eu3+-Cryptate labeled antibody to mark the phosphorylated product of ASK1 on a biotinylated kinase substrate, and detection is by time resolved fluorescence using XL665 labeled streptavidin. The fluorescence intensity is proportional to the amount of product formation. Example C provides the assay protocol.


IC50 values of selected compounds of the invention were measured using the assay described in Example B. Some of the exemplified compounds were shown to have IC50 of greater than 1 μM, some others less than about 1 μM, and most others of the compounds have an IC50 value of less than about 0.1 μM. For example, Compound 30 exhibits an IC50 value of 310 nM. The IC50 values of the exemplified compounds of the present invention are given in Table 1.


It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and variations can be made in the compounds, compositions, kits, and methods of the present invention without departing from the spirit or scope of the invention. Thus, it is intended that the present invention cover the modifications and variations of this invention provided they come within the scope of the appended claims and their equivalents.


EXAMPLES
Example 1
Preparation of intermediates N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (1D) and N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(trifluoromethyl)benzamide (1E)



embedded image


Step A: Commercially available 6-bromopyridin-3-amine (1A, 20 g, 1.0 equivalent) was added in portions to a solution of potassium thiocyanate (5.0 equivalents) in acetic acid (0.4 M) at −5° C. After addition, the mixture was cooled to −15° C., and a solution of Br2 (1.3 equivalent) in acetic acid (9.4 M) was added drop wise via an additional funnel. The mixture was then warmed to room temperature and stirred for 12 h. The resulting precipitate was filtered; 100 mL EtOAc and 200 mL H2O were added to the filtrate and then 200 mL of solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was stirred in ice bath for 10 minutes, and then the resulting precipitate was collected by filtration and washed twice with cold 10% MeOH in Et2O. The filtrate was concentrated and the product was crystallized in ice bath to obtain a second crop of product after washing twice with cold 10% MeOH in Et2O. The product 1B (77%) was obtained as a brown solid after drying under vacuum, and then used without further purification. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 4.94 (br. s., 1H) 7.44 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 7.57 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 8.04 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 230.0 (M+H)+.


Step B: 5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-amine (1B, 5.0 g, 1.0 equivalent) was dissolved in DMA (0.9 M), and then followed by addition of methyl 4-(chlorocarbonyl)benzoate (2.0 equivalent). The mixture was then heated to 50° C. for 1 h. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, a 70 mL solution of 5% MeOH in Et2O was added. After stirring for 10 minutes, the resulting fine precipitate was collected by filtration. The filtered caked was taken into a 150 mL solution of 30% MeOH in Et2O, and stirred at 30° C. for 10 minutes. The mixture was then filtered and the collected solid was washed twice with cold solution of 10% MeOH in Et2O. After drying under vacuum, the product 1C (60%) was obtained as a light yellow solid, and was used in the next step without further purification. 1C: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 3.89 (s, 3H) 7.67-7.74 (m, 1H) 8.05-8.14 (m, 3H) 8.22 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 13.33 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 392.0 (M+H)+.


Step C: Methyl 4-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-ylcarbamoyl)benzoate (1C, 1.4 g, 1.0 equivalent) was dissolved in THF (0.14 M) and then cooled in ice bath. Methyl magnesium bromide (5.0 equivalents) was added slowly, and the mixture was continued to stir at 0° C. for 3 h. Then cold aqueous saturated NH4Cl was added, and the mixture was extracted twice with EtOAc. Combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. 20 mL of MeOH was added to the residue and then heated to 50° C. for 10 minutes. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the resulting precipitate was collected by filtration. After drying under vacuum, the product 1D (54%) was obtained as an off-white solid, and was used in the next step without further purification. 1D: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 5.23 (s, 1H) 7.67 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.72 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 8.07-8.14 (m, 3H) 13.09 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 392.0 (M+H)+.


N-(5-Bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(trifluoromethyl)benzamide (1E) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 1C except 4-(trifluoromethyl)benzoyl chloride was used as a starting material (yield=29%, tan color solid). 1E: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 7.74 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 7.97 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.14 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.31 (d, J=8.08 Hz, 2H) 13.41 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 402.0 (M+H)+.


Example 2
Preparation of intermediate N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide (2F)



embedded image


Step A: Anhydrous cesium carbonate (7.8 g, 1.2 equivalents) was suspended in dixoane (0.25 M). Ethyl 4-bromobenzoate 2A (1.0 equivalent), isobutyraldehyde (2.0 equivalents), Pd(OAc)2 (0.05 equivalent) and tri-tert-butylphosphine (0.1 equivalent) were added. The resulting mixture was heated to 110° C. for 2 h. After cooling, water was added and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. Combined organic layers were dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by chromatography (SiO2) to give 2B (15%) as a colorless oil: 1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 1.32-1.44 (m, 9H) 2.04 (s, 1H) 3.65 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 2H) 4.37 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.41-7.52 (m, 2H), 7.96-8.06 (m, 2H).


Step B: To a solution of ethyl 4-(1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl)benzoate (2B, 680 mg, 1.0 equivalent) and 2,6-lutidine (2.0 equivalents) in CH2Cl2 (0.03 M) was added TBSOTf (1.5 equivalents) at 0° C. With gradual warming to room temperature, the reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h. Water was then added, and the mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2. Combined organic layers were dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by chromatography (SiO2) to give 2C (99%) as a colorless oil: 1H NMR (CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm-0.07 (s, 6H) 0.83 (s, 9H) 1.31 (s, 6H) 1.39 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H) 3.55 (s, 2H) 4.36 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H) 7.44 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H) 7.96 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H).


Step C: To a solution of ethyl 4-(2-{[tert-butyl(dimethyl)silyl]oxy}-1,1-dimethylethyl)benzoate (2C, 1.0 g, 1.0 equivalents) in a 3:1 mixture of THF/MeOH (0.78 M) was added 0.9 M aqueous solution of KOH (2.9 equivalents). The reaction mixture was heated to 70° C. for 1 h. After stirring, the solvents were evaporated, and the residue was acidified with dilute aqueous HCl and then extracted with CH2Cl2. Combined organic layers were dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by chromatography (SiO2) to give 2D (82%) as a white solid: 1H NMR (CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm −0.07 (s, 6H) 0.82 (s, 9H) 1.32 (s, 6H) 3.56 (s, 2H) 7.47 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H) 8.01 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H).


Step D: 4-(1-(tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy)-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzoic acid (2D, 3.0 g, 1.0 equivalent) was dissolved in DMF, then followed by addition of TBTU (1.2 equivalent). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h, then 5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-amine (1.2 equivalent) was added, and followed by Et3N (3.0 equivalents), and this was heated to 60° C. for 12 h. After stirring, water was added and followed by extraction with EtOAc twice. The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by chromatography (SiO2, gradient of 5 to 10% EtOAc/hexanes) to give 2E (60%) as a white solid: ESI-MS: m/z 520.0 (M+H)+.


Step E: N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-(tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy)-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide (2E, 1.9 g, 1.0 equivalent) was dissolved in THF (0.4 M). Cooled mixture in ice bath, and followed by a slow addition of TBAF (1.0M THF solution, 6.5 equivalents). After addition, mixture was warmed to room temperature and then heated to 60° C. for 3 h. After stirring, water was added and followed by extraction with EtOAc twice. The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by chromatography (SiO2, gradient of 1 to 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to give 2F (60%) as a white solid: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.26 (s, 6H) 3.48 (s, 2H) 4.77 (br. s., 1H) 7.57 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.72 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 8.05-8.16 (m, 3H) 13.08 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 406.0 (M+H)+.


Example 3
Preparation of intermediates 4-acetyl-N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (3C) and N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1,1,1-trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (3D)



embedded image


Step A: 4-acetylbenzoic acid 3A (500 mg, 1.0 equivalent) was dissolved in DCM (0.3 M), and then followed by addition of oxalyl chloride (1.2 equivalent) and DMF (0.3 equivalent). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. Volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue 3B was obtained as a white solid and was used without further purification. 3B: ESI-MS: m/z 183.0 (M+H)+.


Step B: 4-acetylbenzoyl chloride (3B, 560 mg, 1.0 equivalent) was dissolved in DMA (0.15 M). Methyl 4-(chlorocarbonyl)benzoate (2.0 equivalent) was then added. The mixture was heated to 50° C. for 12 h, followed by addition of water and extraction with EtOAc twice. The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by chromatography (SiO2, gradient of 5 to 20% EtOAc/Hex) to give 3C (16%) as a tan solid: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 2.66 (s, 3H) 7.73 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.08-8.17 (m, 3H) 8.25 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 13.36 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 376.0 (M+H)+.


Step C: 4-acetyl-N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (3C, 60 mg, 1.0 equivalent) was dissolved in THF (0.1 M), and then followed by trimethyl(trifluoromethyl)silane (2.0 eq) and TBAF (1.0 M THF solution, 0.1 equivalent). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 h, and then followed by addition of 0.5 mL 5 N aqueous HCl and stirred for 12 h. After stirring, water was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc twice. The residue was isolated by preparatory LCMS to give 3D (14%) as a white solid: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 2.66 (s, 3H) 7.72-7.76 (m, 1H) 8.10-8.16 (m, 3H) 8.25 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 13.36 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 446.0 (M+H)+.


Example 4
Preparation of Intermediates N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-tert-butylbenzamide (4A) and 4-tert-butyl-N-(5-chlorothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (4B)



embedded image


5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-amine (1B, 1.0 g, 1.0 equivalent) was dissolved in DMA (0.36 M), and then 4-tert-butylbenzoyl chloride (2.0 equivalents) was added. The mixture was heated to 50° C. under N2 for 7 h. After cooling to room temperature, the crude mixture was added saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and extracted with EtOAc three times. Combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by chromatography (SiO2, gradient of 5 to 20% EtOAc/hexanes) to give 4A (44%) as a white solid: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.33 (s, 9H) 7.61 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.72 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 8.10 (dd, J=8.34, 3.03 Hz, 3H) 13.08 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 390.0 (M+H)+.


4-tert-Butyl-N-(5-chlorothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (4B) was prepared as a white solid (yield=20%) using a procedure analogous to that described above for 4A except that 5-chlorothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-amine (1B′) was used as starting material. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.33 (s, 9H) 7.60 (dd, J=8.46, 1.64 Hz, 3H) 8.10 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.20 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 13.08 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 346.0 (M+H)+.


Example 5
Preparation of N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-cyclopropylbenzamide (5)



embedded image


Step A: To a microwave vial, 5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-amine (1B, 100 mg, 1.0 equivalent), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (5A, 2.0 equivalent), Na2CO3 (4.0 equivalents), DMF (0.15 M) and H2O (0.73 M) were added. While mixture was under N2, Pd(PPh3)4 was added and the mixture was then heated in a microwave for 3 h at 150° C. The crude mixture was filtered, and purified by preparatory LCMS. Intermediate 5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-amine (5B) was obtained as a white solid. ESI-MS: m/z 218.0 (M+H)+.


Step B: 5B (25.0 mg, 1.0 equivalent) and 4-cyclopropylbenzoic acid (1.1 equivalent) were dissolved in DMF, followed by addition of HOBt (1.0 equivalent), EDC (1.0 equivalent), Et3N (2.0 equivalents). The mixture was stirred for 12 h at room temperature. The crude mixture was filtered and purified by LCMS to give the titled compound 5 as a white solid: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 0.77-0.87 (m, 2H) 1.04-1.13 (m, 2H) 2.01-2.10 (m, 1H) 7.28 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.68 (t, J=7.58 Hz, 1H) 7.82-7.91 (m, 3H) 7.99 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.47 (s, 1H) 9.03 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 362.0 (M+H)+.


Example 6
Preparation of N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)nicotinamide (6)



embedded image


Step A: 5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-amine (1B, 200 mg, 1.0 equivalent) and nicotinoyl chloride hydrochloride (6A, 2.0 equivalents) was added pyridine (0.17 M) and was stirred at room temperature for 12 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo, and MeOH/Et2O was added to the residue and cooled in ice bath for 10 minutes. The resulting precipitate was collected by filtration and washed twice with cold 10% MeOH in Et2O to afford compound 6B (70%) as a white solid: ESI-MS: m/z 335.0 (M+H)+.


Step B: N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)nicotinamide (5C) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in Step A in Example 5 except that N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)nicotinamide (6B) was used as starting material instead of 1B. After cooling to room temperature, the crude mixture was filtered and purified by LCMS to give the TFA salt of the titled compound 6 (21%) as a yellow solid: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 7.64 (dd, J=7.96, 4.93 Hz, 1H) 7.85 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.13 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 8.29 (s, 2H) 8.41-8.54 (m, 1H) 8.84 (d, J=4.80 Hz, 1H) 9.26 (s, 1H) 13.19 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 323.0 (M+H)+.


Example 7
Preparation of N-(5-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (7)



embedded image


N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (1D, 50 mg, 1.0 equivalent), imidazole (2.0 equivalents), CuI (0.1 equivalent), K2CO3 (2.0 equivalents) were dissolved in DMF (0.06 M) and heated to 150° C. under N2 for 12 h. After cooling to room temperature, the crude mixture was filtered and purified by LCMS to give the TFA salt of the titled compound 7 (33%) as a yellow solid: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.48 (s, 6H) 7.68 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.85 (br. s., 1H) 8.02-8.21 (m, 3H) 8.48 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 9.81 (br. s., 1H) 13.18 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 380.0 (M+H)+.


Example 8
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (8)



embedded image


N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (1D, 50 mg, 1.0 equivalent) and pyrrolidine (3.0 equivalents) were dissolved in NMP (0.06 M) under N2 in microwave vial. The mixture was heated to 180° C. for 20 minutes. After cooling to room temperature, the crude mixture was filtered and purified by LCMS to give the TFA salt of the titled compound 8 (35%) as a yellow solid: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 1.92-2.02 (m, 4H) 3.40-3.50 (m, 4H) 6.61 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.63 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.86 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.05 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 12.53 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 383.0 (M+H)+.


Example 9
Preparation of N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-tert-butylbenzamide (9)



embedded image


The titled compound, N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-tert-butylbenzamide (9), was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in Step A of Example 5 except N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-tert-butylbenzamide (4A, 100 mg, 1.0 equivalent) was used. After heating in microwave at 160° C. for 1.5 h, the crude was cooled to room temperature. Then the crude mixture was filtered and purified by LCMS to give the TFA salt of the titled compound 9 (59%) as a white solid: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.34 (s, 9H) 7.61 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.84 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 8.10 (d, J=7.83 Hz, 3H) 8.29 (br. s., 2H) 12.88 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 378.0 (M+H)+.


Example 10
Preparation of 4-tert-butyl-N-(5-(pyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (10)



embedded image


The titled compound was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9). To a microwave vial, N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-tert-butylbenzamide (4A, 120 mg, 1.0 equivalent) and 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine (1.2 equivalent) in dioxane (0.17 M) and DMF (0.51 M) was stirred in N2. Followed by addition of Na2CO3 (2 M aqueous solution, 8.0 equivalents) and PdCl2(dppf)/DCM adduct (0.05 equivalent). The mixture was heated at 120° C. for 10 minutes. After cooling to room temperature, the crude mixture was added saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and extracted with EtOAc twice. Combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by chromatography (SiO2, gradient of 1 to 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to give the titled compound 10 (50%) as a tan solid: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.33 (s, 9H) 7.61 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.08-8.16 (m, 4H) 8.27 (d, J=1.77 Hz, 2H) 8.72 (d, J=6.06 Hz, 2H) 13.07 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 389.0 (M+H)+.


Example 11
Preparation of N-(5-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-tert-butylbenzamide (11)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=21%) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 7 (Example 7) except 4A was used as a starting material. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.33 (s, 9H) 7.16 (s, 1H) 7.60 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.94 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.04 (s, 1H) 8.11 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.33 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.60 (s, 1H) 13.03 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 378.0 (M+H)+.


Example 12
Preparation of N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (12)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=12%) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 1D (Example 1) was used as a starting material. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 7.66 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.83 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.10 (dd, J=8.46, 2.15 Hz, 3H) 8.30 (br. s., 2H) 12.88 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 380.0 (M+H)+.


Example 13
Preparation of N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide (13)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=37%) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 2F (Example 2) and 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.27 (s, 6H) 3.48 (s, 3H) 7.57 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.83 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.02-8.17 (m, 3H) 8.28 (s, 2H) 12.88 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 394.0 (M+H)+.


Example 14
Preparation of N-(5-(3,5-dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (14)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=25%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 1D (Example 1) and 3,5-dimethyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 2.40 (s, 6H) 7.54 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 7.66 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.04-8.19 (m, 3H) 12.89 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 408.0 (M+H)+.


Example 15
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (15)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=11%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 1D (Example 1) and 3-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 2.58 (s, 3H) 7.66 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.74 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.09 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 4H) 12.86 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 394.0 (M+H)+.


Example 16
Preparation of N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-acetylbenzamide (16)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=19%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 3C (Example 3) was used instead. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 2.66 (s, 3H) 7.85 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.12 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 3H) 8.19-8.36 (m, 4H) 13.16 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 364.0 (M+H)+.


Example 17
Preparation of N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1,1,1-trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (17)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=23%) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 3D (Example 3) was used as a starting material. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.75 (s, 3H) 6.83 (s, 1H) 7.82 (dd, J=19.58, 8.46 Hz, 3H) 8.09-8.20 (m, 3H) 8.28 (br. s., 1H) 13.00 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 434.0 (M+H)+.


Example 18
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (18)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=4%) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 1D (Example 1) and 1-methyl-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.47 (s, 6H) 4.20 (s, 3H) 6.86 (d, J=1.26 Hz, 1H) 7.52 (d, J=1.26 Hz, 1H) 7.67 (d, J=8.08 Hz, 2H) 7.92 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.11 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.23 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 13.03 (s, 1H);); ESI-MS: m/z 394.0 (M+H)+.


Example 19
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (19)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=37%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 1D (Example 1) and 1-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 3.90 (s, 3H) 7.66 (d, J=8.08 Hz, 2H) 7.78 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.04-8.14 (m, 4H) 8.38 (s, 1H) 12.89 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 394.0 (M+H)+.


Example 20
Preparation of methyl 4-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-ylcarbamoyl)benzoate (20)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=17%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 1C (Example 3) and 3-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 2.58 (s, 3H) 3.91 (s, 3H) 6.56 (br. s., 1H) 7.76 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.12 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 4H) 8.25 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 13.15 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 394.0 (M+H)+.


Example 21
Preparation of 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (21)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=20%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 2F (Example 2) and 3-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.27 (s, 6H) 2.59 (br. s., 3H) 3.49 (br. s., 2H) 7.57 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.74 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.02 (br. s., 1H) 8.05-8.13 (m, 3H) 12.86 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 408.0 (M+H)+.


Example 22
Preparation of N-(5-(2-ethyl-1H-imidazol-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (22)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=31%) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 7 (Example 7) except 2-ethyl-1H-imidazole was used as a starting material. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.28 (t, J=7.58 Hz, 3H) 1.47 (s, 6H) 3.12 (q, J=7.41 Hz, 2H) 7.68 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.84 (s, 1H) 7.91 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.08-8.19 (m, 3H) 8.51 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 13.24 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 408.0 (M+H)+.


Example 23
Preparation of methyl 4-(5-(3-ethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-ylcarbamoyl)benzoate (23)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=30%) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 7 (Example 7) except 2-ethyl-1H-imidazole and 1C (Example 1) were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.28 (t, J=7.33 Hz, 3H) 3.09 (q, J=7.16 Hz, 2H) 3.92 (s, 3H) 7.73 (br. s., 1H) 7.89 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.07 (br. s., 1H) 8.15 (d, J=8.08 Hz, 2H) 8.27 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.52 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 408.0 (M+H)+.


Example 24
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (24)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=7%) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 10 (Example 10) except 3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-ylboronic acid and 1D (Example 1) were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.47 (s, 6H) 7.67 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.76 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 8.11 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.20 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.57 (s, 1H) 12.97 (s, 1H) 13.88 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 448.0 (M+H)+.


Example 25
Preparation of 4-(1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (25)



embedded image


Intermediate 9A (N-(5-bromothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 4-(1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzoic acid and 1B (Example 1) were used as starting materials.


The titled compound 25 (yield=2%) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 9A and 3-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole were used as starting materials. 25: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 2.60 (s, 3H) 7.75 (s, 1H) 7.89 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.01 (br. s., 1H) 8.11 (s, 1H) 8.26 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 9.04 (s, 1H) 13.08 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 502.0 (M+H)+.


Example 26
Preparation of 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methylpyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (26)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=70%) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 2F (Example 2) and 3-methylpyridin-4-ylboronic acid were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.21 (s, 6H) 2.47 (s, 3H) 3.42 (s, 2H) 7.52 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.81-7.90 (m, 2H) 8.04 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.26 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 8.69 (d, J=4.29 Hz, 1H) 8.75 (br. s., 1H) 13.05 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 419.0 (M+H)+.


Example 27
Preparation of 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-(methylcarbamoyl)phenyl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (27)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=15%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 4-(methylcarbamoyl)phenylboronic acid and 2F (Example 2) were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.27 (s, 6H) 2.82 (d, J=4.55 Hz, 3H) 3.49 (d, J=5.31 Hz, 2H) 4.75-4.81 (m, 1H) 7.58 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 7.98 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.11 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 8.17-8.22 (m, 1H) 8.22-8.28 (m, 3H) 8.56 (q, J=4.63 Hz, 1H) 13.02 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 461.0 (M+H)+.


Example 28
Preparation of 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-methoxypyrimidin-5-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (28)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=33%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 2F (Example 2) and 2-methoxypyrimidin-5-yl boronic acid were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.27 (s, 6H) 3.49 (d, J=5.05 Hz, 2H) 4.01 (s, 3H) 4.78 (t, J=5.31 Hz, 1H) 7.58 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.10 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.16 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.22-8.29 (m, 1H) 9.33 (s, 2H) 13.02 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 436.0 (M+H)+.


Example 29
Preparation of N-(5-(6-acetamidopyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide (29)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=14%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 10 (Example 10) except N-(5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl)acetamide and 2F (Example 2) were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.27 (s, 6H) 2.14 (s, 3H) 3.49 (d, J=5.31 Hz, 2H) 4.78 (t, J=5.31 Hz, 1H) 7.58 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.06-8.18 (m, 3H) 8.18-8.26 (m, 2H) 8.52 (dd, J=8.84, 2.53 Hz, 1H) 9.09 (d, J=1.77 Hz, 1H) 10.73 (s, 1H) 13.00 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 462.0 (M+H)+.


Example 30
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(pyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (30)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=26%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 10 (Example 10) except that 1D (Example 1) and 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.47 (s, 6H) 7.68 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.12 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.29-8.46 (m, 4H) 8.87 (br. s., 2H) 13.15 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 391.0 (M+H)+.


Example 31
Preparation of N-(5-(2-fluoropyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide (31)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=38%, light yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 10 (Example 10) except that 2F (Example 2) and 2-fluoropyridin-4-ylboronic acid were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.27 (s, 6H) 3.49 (d, J=3.03 Hz, 2H) 4.78 (br. s., 1H) 7.59 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.91 (s, 1H) 8.06-8.16 (m, 3H) 8.27-8.36 (m, 2H) 8.38 (d, J=5.31 Hz, 1H) 13.11 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 423.0 (M+H)+.


Example 32
Preparation of N-(5-(6-aminopyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide (32)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=22%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 10 (Example 10) except that 2F (Example 2) and 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridin-2-amine were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.27 (s, 6H) 3.17 (s, 2H) 3.49 (s, 1H) 7.03 (d, J=9.35 Hz, 1H) 7.58 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.89 (br. s., 2H) 8.08 (dd, J=11.12, 8.59 Hz, 3H) 8.24 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.62 (dd, J=9.35, 2.27 Hz, 1H) 8.72 (d, J=1.77 Hz, 1H) 13.02 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 420.0 (M+H)+.


Example 33
Preparation of 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(6-hydroxypyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (33)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=21%, tan solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 10 (Example 10) except 2F (Example 2) and 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridin-2-ol were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.27 (s, 6H) 3.48 (s, 2H) 6.48 (d, J=9.60 Hz, 1H) 7.58 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 7.96 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.09 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.14 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 8.20 (d, J=2.27 Hz, 1H) 8.27 (dd, J=9.60, 2.78 Hz, 1H) 11.99 (br. s., 1H) 12.93 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 421.0 (M+H)+.


Example 34
Preparation of 4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(pyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (34)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=63%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 10 (Example 10) except 2F (Example 2) and 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.28 (s, 6H) 3.49 (s, 2H) 7.59 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.10-8.12 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.31-8.36 (m, 1H) 8.37-8.44 (m, 3H) 8.85 (d, J=5.31 Hz, 2H) 13.15 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 405.0 (M+H)+.


Example 35
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(6-hydroxypyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (35)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=22%, tan solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 10 (Example 10) except 2F (Example 2) and 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridin-2-ol were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.47 (s, 6H) 5.23 (s, 1H) 6.48 (d, J=9.60 Hz, 1H) 7.63-7.70 (m, 2H) 7.96 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 8.07-8.16 (m, 3H) 8.21 (d, J=2.53 Hz, 1H) 8.27 (dd, J=9.60, 2.78 Hz, 1H) 12.00 (br. s., 1H) 12.94 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 407.0 (M+H)+.


Example 36
Preparation of (R)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-hydroxypyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (36)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=49%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except that (R)-pyrrolidin-3-ol was used as a starting material. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 1.86-1.99 (m, 1H) 2.00-2.12 (m, 1H) 3.38 (d, J=11.12 Hz, 1H) 3.48-3.59 (m, 3H) 4.38-4.46 (m, 1H) 6.61 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 7.63 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.87 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.84; Hz, 2H) 12.54 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 399.0 (M+H)+.


Example 37
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-morpholinothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (37)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=12%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except morpholine was used a starting material. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 3.46-3.55 (m, 4H) 3.68-3.78 (m, 4H) 7.02 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.93 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 12.63 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 399.0 (M+H)+.


Example 38
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(piperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (38)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=13%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except piperidine was used as a starting material. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 1.59 (br. s., 6H) 3.45-3.62 (m, 4H) 6.99 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.63 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.86 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 12.56 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 397.0 (M+H)+.


Example 39
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-oxopiperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (39)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=15%, tan color solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except piperazin-2-one was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 2 h. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 3.33 (br. s., 2H) 3.79 (t, J=5.31 Hz, 2H) 4.06 (s, 2H) 7.00 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.94 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.14 (br. s., 1H) 12.63 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 412.0 (M+H)+.


Example 40
Preparation of N-(5-(2-chloropyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (40)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=43%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 1D (Example 1) and 2-chloro-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.47 (s, 6H) 5.24 (s, 1H) 7.67 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.12 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 8.18 (d, J=5.56 Hz, 1H) 8.25 (s, 1H) 8.28-8.37 (m, 2H) 8.55 (d, J=5.31 Hz, 1H) 13.12 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 425.0 (M+H)+.


Example 41
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-methoxypyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (41)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=37%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 9 (Example 9) except 1D (Example 1) and 2-methoxypyridin-4-ylboronic acid were used as starting materials. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.47 (s, 6H) 3.93 (s, 3H) 7.54 (s, 1H) 7.67 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.75 (dd, J=5.43, 1.39 Hz, 1H) 8.11 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.25 (d, J=1.52 Hz, 2H) 8.31 (d, J=5.31 Hz, 1H) 13.07 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 421.0 (M+H)+.


Example 42
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(piperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (42)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=25%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except piperazine was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, MeOD) δ ppm 1.57 (s, 6H) 3.33-3.40 (m, 4H) 3.82-3.91 (m, 4H) 7.07 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.69 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 7.95 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.01 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H); ESI-MS: m/z 398.0 (M+H)+.


Example 43
Preparation of N-(5-(4-(hydroxymethyl)piperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (43)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=22%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except piperidin-4-ylmethanol was used as a starting material. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.09-1.35 (m, 2H) 1.46 (s, 6H) 1.63 (br. s., 1H) 1.71-1.81 (m, 2H) 2.77-2.94 (m, 2H) 3.28 (d, J=6.32 Hz, 2H) 4.26-4.45 (m, 2H) 7.00 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.86 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 12.57 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 427.0 (M+H)+.


Example 44
Preparation of N-(5-(6,7-dihydro-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-5(4H)-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (44)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=7%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except 4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine hydrochloride and Et3N (6.0 equivalents) were used, and the reaction was first heated at 180° C. for 20 min and then 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 2.78 (br. s., 2H) 3.95 (t, J=5.43 Hz, 2H) 4.62 (s, 2H) 7.09 (d, J=0.09 Hz, 1H) 7.50 (br. s., 1H) 7.64 (d, 2H) 7.91 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, 2H) 12.59 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 435.0 (M+H)+.


Example 45
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(5-oxo-1,4-diazepan-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (45)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=7%, tan color solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except 1,4-diazepan-5-one was used as a starting material, and the reaction was first heated at 180° C. for 20 min and then 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 2.52-2.59 (m, 2H) 3.23 (br. s., 2H) 3.82 (t, J=6.19 Hz, 4H) 6.99 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.91 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 12.59 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 426.0 (M+H)+.


Example 46
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-methoxypiperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (46)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=37%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except 4-methoxypiperidine was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 1.93 (br. s., 2H) 3.13-3.26 (m, 2H) 3.29 (s, 3H) 3.43 (br. s., 2H) 3.98 (d, J=13.39 Hz, 2H) 4.10 (br. s., 1H) 5.21 (br. s., 1H) 7.02 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.88 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 12.58 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 427.0 (M+H)+.


Example 47
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (47)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=39%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except 1-methylpiperazine was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 2.87 (d, J=4.04 Hz, 3H) 3.06-3.27 (m, 4H) 3.54 (d, J=11.12 Hz, 2H) 4.46 (d, J=12.13 Hz, 2H) 7.13 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 8.01 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 9.77 (br. s., 1H) 12.69 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 412.0 (M+H)+.


Example 48
Preparation of (S)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (48)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=33%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except (S)-2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 1.92-1.99 (m, 2H) 2.00-2.09 (m, 1H) 3.24-3.36 (m, 5H) 3.48-3.58 (m, 2H) 4.22 (br. s., 2H) 6.68 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.63 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 7.87 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 12.54 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 427.0 (M+H)+.


Example 49
Preparation of N-(5-(4-acetylpiperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (49)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=4%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except 1-(piperazin-1-yl)ethanone was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, MeOD) δ ppm 1.57 (s, 6H) 2.16 (s, 3H) 3.58-3.64 (m, 2H) 3.70 (s, 4H) 3.71-3.76 (m, 2H) 6.98 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.69 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 7.89 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.00 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H); ESI-MS: m/z 440.0 (M+H)+.


Example 50
Preparation of (R)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (50)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=33%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except (R)-2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 1.96 (d, J=5.56 Hz, 3H) 2.00-2.10 (m, 1H) 3.24-3.37 (m, 5H) 3.53 (dd, J=9.35, 4.04 Hz, 2H) 4.22 (br. s., 1H) 6.68 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.87 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 12.55 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 427.0 (M+H)+.


Example 51
Preparation of N-(5-(3-cyanopiperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (51)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=8%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except piperidine-3-carbonitrile was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 1.55-1.79 (m, 2H) 1.83-2.03 (m, 2H) 3.05-3.16 (m, 1H) 3.47-3.59 (m, 1H) 3.60-3.72 (m, 1H) 3.78-3.84 (m, 1H) 3.87-3.94 (m, 1H) 7.10 (d, J=9.35 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.92 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 12.63 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 422.0 (M+H)+.


Example 52
Preparation of N-(5-(4-hydroxypiperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (52)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=45%, off-white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except piperidin-4-ol was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.35-1.49 (m, 8H) 1.78-1.87 (m, 2H) 3.09-3.20 (m, 2H) 3.72 (ddd, J=8.53, 4.55, 4.36 Hz, 1H) 4.04 (ddd, J=13.01, 4.29, 4.17 Hz, 2H) 5.21 (br. s., 1H) 7.01 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.87 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 12.58 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 413.0 (M+H)+.


Example 53
Preparation of (S)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (53)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=27%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except (S)-pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.39 (s, 6H) 1.87-1.99 (m, 3H) 2.07-2.19 (m, 1H) 3.36-3.38 (m, 1H) 3.57-3.66 (m, 1H) 4.19-4.27 (m, 1H) 6.49 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 6.93 (s, 1H) 7.35 (s, 1H) 7.56 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 7.82 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 7.99 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 12.47 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 426.0 (M+H)+.


Example 54
Preparation of (R)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (54)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=12%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except (R)-pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.39 (s, 6H) 1.91 (br. s., 3H) 2.08-2.20 (m, 1H) 3.61 (br. s., 2H) 4.24 (d, J=8.08 Hz, 1H) 6.49 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 2H) 6.93 (br. s., 1H) 7.35 (br. s., 1H) 7.56 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.82 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 7.99 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 12.47 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 426.0 (M+H)+.


Example 55
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-oxo-3,4,7,8-tetrahydropyrido[4,3-d]pyrimidin-6(5H)-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (55)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=7%, orange solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except 5,6,7,8-tetrahydropyrido[4,3-d]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one hydrochloride and Et3N (6.0 equivalents) were used, and the reaction was first heated at 180° C. for 1 h. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.47 (s, 6H) 2.76 (t, J=5.18 Hz, 2H) 3.90 (t, J=5.68 Hz, 2H) 4.37 (s, 2H) 7.12 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.65 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.96 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.03-8.13 (m, 3H) 12.64 (s, 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 463.0 (M+H)+.


Example 56
Preparation of (S)—N-(5-(2-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (56)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=38%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except (S)-pyrrolidin-2-ylmethanol was used, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.39 (s, 6H) 1.82-1.91 (m, 2H) 1.93-2.01 (m, 2H) 3.17-3.29 (m, 2H) 3.42-3.50 (m, 1H) 3.54 (dd, J=10.61, 3.79 Hz, 1H) 3.99 (br. s., 1H) 6.61 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 7.56 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.80 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 7.99 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 12.47 (br. s., 1H); ESI-MS: m/z 413.0 (M+H)+.


Example 57
Preparation of (S)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid (57)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=21%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except (S)-pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid hydrochloride and Et3N (6.0 equivalents) were used, and the reaction was heated at 180° C. for 40 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 2.12-2.30 (m, 2H) 3.22 (ddd, J=13.77, 7.07, 6.95 Hz, 1H) 3.45-3.58 (m, 2H) 3.60-3.75 (m, 2H) 5.21 (s, 1H) 6.64 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 7.88 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H) 12.55 (br. s., 2H); ESI-MS: m/z 427.0 (M+H)+.


Example 58
Preparation of (R)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid (58)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=12%, yellow solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except (R)-pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid hydrochloride and Et3N (6.0 equivalents) were used, and the reaction was heated at 180° C. for 40 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 2.14-2.29 (m, 2H) 3.16-3.27 (m, 1H) 3.43-3.73 (m, 4H) 6.63 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 7.63 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.87 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 8.05 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 12.54 (br. s., 1H); m/z 427.0 (M+H)+.


Example 59
Preparation of N-(5-(3-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide (59)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=12%, yellow oil) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except pyrrolidin-3-ylmethanol was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 20 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, MEOD) δ ppm 1.57 (s, 6H) 1.87-1.99 (m, 1H) 2.16-2.28 (m, 1H) 2.55-2.69 (m, 1H) 3.33-3.43 (m, 3H) 3.54-3.64 (m, 1H) 3.64-3.77 (m, 2H) 6.83 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 1H) 7.69 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.97-8.07 (m, 3H); ESI-MS: m/z 413.0 (M+H)+.


Example 60
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-(methylsulfonyl)piperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (60)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=12%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8)) except 1-(methylsulfonyl)piperazine hydrochloride and Et3N (6.0 equivalents) were used, and the reaction was heated at 180° C. for 80 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 1.46 (s, 6H) 2.92 (s, 3H) 3.20-3.27 (m, 4H) 3.65-3.74 (m, 4H) 5.21 (br. s., 1H) 7.08 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.95 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 8.06 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 12.64 (s, 1); ESI-MS: m/z 476.0 (M+H)+.


Example 61
Preparation of 4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(1,1-dioxothiomorpholino)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide (61)



embedded image


The titled compound (yield=2%, white solid) was prepared using a procedure analogous to that described in connection with 8 (Example 8) except thiomorpholine 1,1-dioxide was used as a starting material, and the reaction was heated at 200° C. for 50 min. 1H NMR (400 MHz, MeOD) δ ppm 1.57 (s, 6H) 3.10-3.18 (m, 4H) 4.23 (br. s., 4H) 7.11 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 7.69 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H) 7.94 (d, J=9.09 Hz, 1H) 8.01 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 2H); ESI-MS: m/z 447.0 (M+H)+.


Example A
Preparation of ASK1 Protein

Cloning of cDNA encoding human ASK1 was conducted by PCR using primers, 5′-AAAAGTCGACATGGACTACAAGGACGACGATGACAAGGTGAACAC CATTACCGAAGAGAAGGGGA-3 (SEQ ID NO: 1) and 5′-AAAGCGGCCGCTCAA GTCTGTTTGTTTCGAAAGTCAATG-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 2), from human heart cDNA library (Becton, Dickinson and Company). The PCR product was subjected to agarose gel (1%) electrophoresis, a 2.2 kb DNA fragment containing an ASK1 gene was recovered from the gel, and then digested with restriction enzymes, NotI and SalI, and inserted into a plasmid pFASTBAC1 (Invitrogen) to prepare a plasmid pFB-ASK1. The insert was verified by sequencing. Recombinant baculovirus was prepared according to the procedure of the Bac-to-Bac baculovirus expression system (Invitrogen).


Sf-21 cells were seeded to achieve 1×106 cells/mL in 100 mL of Sf-900 II SFM medium (Invitrogen) which contains 10% fetal calf serum and then cultured at 27° C. for 24 hrs. To express ASK1 in cells, 0.15 mL of the recombinant baculovirus virus stock was added to cells, and the then cultured for 60 hrs. The cells were separated from the culture solution by centrifugation at 3000 rpm for 10 min and washed once with PBS. The cells were suspended in 10 mL of lysis buffer (25 mM HEPES (pH 7.5), 1% Triton X, 130 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA, 1 mM DTT, 25 mM β-glycerophosphate, Protease inhibitor complete (Roche), 1 mM sodium orthovanadate) and ruptured by four times of treatment with a homogenizer (POLYTRON) at 20000 rpm for 30 seconds. Active ASK1 protein was purified from a supernatant obtained by centrifugal separation at 40000 rpm for 45 min using anti-FLAG M2 Affinity Gel (Sigma).


Example B
Scintillation Assay for Measuring the Inhibitory Effect of Exemplified Compounds of the Invention Against ASK1

The test compounds (2.5 μL) dissolved in DMSO were added to wells containing 37.5 μl of the reaction solution (25 mM HEPES (pH 7.5), 10 mM magnesium acetate, 1 mM DTT) including 30 ng of active ASK1 protein and 1 μg of myelin basic protein (Wako), and incubated at room temperature for 5 min. To start the reaction, 10 μL of ATP solution (2.5 μM ATP, 0.1 μCi [γ-32P]ATP) was added to wells. After incubating at room temperature for 30 min, the reaction was terminated by adding 50 μl of 20% TCA solution. The reaction solution was incubated at 4° C. for 30 min and an acid-insoluble fraction was transferred onto a GF/C filter (Packard) with Cell Harvester (Packard), and washed with 250 mM phosphoric acid. After drying at 45° C. for 60 min., 40 μL of Microscint 0 (Packard) was added and the radioactivity was measured with TopCount (Packard). The concentrations (IC50 value) of the test compounds necessary for 50% inhibition of kinase activity were calculated by PRISM 3.0 (Graphpad Software).


Example C
Homogeneous Time-Resolved Fluorescence (HTRF) Assay for Measuring the Inhibitory Effect of Exemplified Compounds of the Invention Against ASK1

Recombinant human ASK1 is purchased from Millipore (Cat #14-606). The enzymatic assay of ASK1 is set up by using HTRF® KinEASE™ STK S3 kit, the Universal Assay for Serine/Threonine Kinases kit from CisBio.


The inhibitory properties of compounds to ASK1 may be determined using a white 384-well-plate format under the following reaction conditions: 25 nM ASK1, 1 μM CisBio STK S3-biotion peptide, 100 μM ATP, and 1%-2% DMSO in kinase assay buffer of 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.3, 10 mM NaCl, 10 mM MgCl2, 0.01% Brij35, 0.2 mM EDTA, and 1 mM DTT. Reaction product is determined quantitatively by HTRF after the addition of detection reagent SA-XL665 and STK-antibody-cryptate.


The assay reaction may be initiated as follows: 2 μl of the mixture of 3 μM CisBio STK S3-biotion peptide and 300 μM ATP with 2 μl of test compound (2 fold serial dilutions for 11 data points for each inhibitor) containing 3%-6% DMSO are added to each well of the plate, followed by the addition of 2 μL of 75 nM ASK1 to initiate the reaction (final enzyme concentration was 25 nM for ASK1). The reaction mixture may then be incubated at room temperature for 1 hour, and quenched and developed by the addition of 6 μL of 100-fold diluted STK-antibody-Cryptate and 250 nM SA-XL665 in Cisbio HTRF detection buffer (50 mM HEPES, pH7.0, 0.1% BSA, 0.8 M KF, and 20 mM EDTA). The fluorescence intensity is measured at 620 nm (Cryptate) and 665 nm (XL665) after a 1-2 hour incubation at room temperature. A ratio is calculated (665/620) for each well and is fitted to the standard IC50 curve to determine inhibition constants (IC50).


Example D
In Vitro IC50 Values of Compounds of the Invention Against ASK1

The enzyme activities of the compounds of the present invention against ASK1 were determined using the assay disclosed in Example A and B. The resulted IC50 values are reported in Table 1.









TABLE 1







IC50 of Exemplified Compounds Against ASK1











Enzyme Activity



Compound No
IC50(nM)














5
>1,000  



7
100-1,000



8
>1,000  



9
<100



10
100-1,000



11
100-1,000



12
<100



13
<100



14
100-1,000



15
<100



19
100-1,000



20
>1,000  



21
<100



22
>1,000  



26
100-1,000



30
100-1,000



33
<100



34
100-1,000



35
<100



36
>1,000  



38
>1,000  









Claims
  • 1. A compound of the formula:
  • 2. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is a five-membered heteroaryl containing up to four heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, and where the heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B.
  • 3. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is selected from the group consisting of furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, and thiadiazolyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B.
  • 4. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is a thienyl, unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B.
  • 5. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is a six-membered heteroaryl, which contains up to four nitrogen atoms, and is unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B.
  • 6. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is selected from the group consisting of pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, and triazinyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B.
  • 7. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B.
  • 8. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is pyridinyl, unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-3 substituents of ring B.
  • 9. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein each of said 1-3 substituents of ring B is independently selected from the group consisting of halo, nitro, oxy, hydroxy, (C1-6)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, aza(C1-6)alkyl, oxa(C1-6)alkyl, oxo(C1-6)alkyl, (C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-6)cycloalkyl(C1-5)alkyl, aryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, (C3-7)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-7)alicyclyl, (C4-12)aryl, and hetero(C1-10)aryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.
  • 10. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein each of said 1-3 substituents of ring B is independently selected from the group consisting of halo, hydroxyl, nitro, thio, cyano, (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C2-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkoxy, hydroxyl(C1-6)alkyl, mercapto, sulfinyl, sulfonyl, sulfamoyl, amino, amido, carboxyamido, carbamoyl, carbonyl and carbonyloxy, each unsubstituted or substituted.
  • 11. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein each of said 1-3 substituents of ring B is independently selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, halo, cyano, (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C2-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, —C(CH3)(OH)CF3, (C1-6)alkoxy,
  • 12. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 11, wherein R21 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, perfluoromethyl, hydroxyl, hydroxyl(C1-4alkyl, and cyano(C1-4)alkyl.
  • 13. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is an unsubstituted or substituted phenyl of the formula
  • 14. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is an unsubstituted or substituted phenyl of the formula
  • 15. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 14, wherein R21 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, perfluoromethyl, hydroxyl, hydroxyl(C1-4alkyl, and cyano(C1-4)alkyl.
  • 16. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 14, wherein R9 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, t-butyl, —C(CH3)(OH)CF3, —C(OH)(CH3)2, and —C(CH2OH)(CH3)2; and R7, R8, R10, and R11 are each hydrogen.
  • 17. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is selected from the group consisting of
  • 18. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring B is selected from the group consisting of
  • 19. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C5-7)alicyclyl, hetero(C1-6)alicyclyl, (C8-11)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C4-10)bicycloalicyclyl, (C6)aryl, hetero(C1-5)aryl, (C8-10)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-10)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A, where each hetero(C1-6)alicyclyl, hetero(C4-10)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C1-5)aryl, and hetero(C4-10)bicycloaryl contains 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur; andeach (C8-11)bicycloalicyclyl, hetero(C4-10)bicycloalicyclyl, (C8-10)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C4-10)bicycloaryl comprises of a first ring fused to a second ring, where the first ring attaches directly to the ring containing Na, and where the second ring is selected from a group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyls.
  • 20. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 19, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, hetero(C2-5)aryl, (C9-10)bicycloaryl, and hetero(C5-10)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A, wherein the hetero(C2-5)aryl is a six-membered heteroaryl;the (C9-10)bicycloaryl comprises a first ring that is a phenyl, and a second ring that is a five membered heteroaryl or a phenyl;the hetero(C5-10)bicycloaryl comprises a first ring that is a six-membered heteroaryl, and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, five-membered heteroaryl and six-membered heteroaryl;each hetero(C2-5)aryl and hetero(C5-10)bicycloaryl contains 1-4 heteroatoms each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.
  • 21. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 20, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 22. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 20, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 23. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 19, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of hetero(C1-4)aryl and hetero(C4-9)bicycloaryl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents, where the hetero(C1-4)aryl is a five-membered heteroaryl;the hetero(C4-9)bicycloaryl comprises of a first ring that is a five-membered heteroaryl, and a second ring that is selected from the group of phenyl, and five, six and seven membered heteroaryl; andeach hetero(C1-4)aryl and hetero(C4-9)bicycloaryl contains 1-4 heteroatoms each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.
  • 24. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 23, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 25. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 23, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 26. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 19, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C6)alicyclyl, hetero(C1-5)alicyclyl, (C9-11)bicycloalicyclyl, and hetero(C5-10)bicycloalicyclyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents of ring A, wherein the hetero(C1-5)alicyclyl is a six-membered heteroalicyclyl;the (C9-11)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a six-membered alicyclyl, and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyl;the hetero(C5-10)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a six-membered heteroalicyclyl, and a second ring that is a five, six or seven membered cyclyl;each hetero(C1-5)alicyclyl and hetero(C5-10)bicycloalicyclyl contains 1-4 heteroatoms, each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.
  • 27. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 26, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 28. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 19, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C5)alicyclyl, hetero(C1-4) alicyclyl, (C8-10)bicycloalicyclyl, and hetero(C4-9)bicycloalicyclyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents, wherein the hetero(C1-4)alicyclyl is a five-membered heteroalicyclyl,the (C8-10)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a five-membered alicyclyl, and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyl;the hetero(C4-9)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a five-membered heterocycloalicyclyl, and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyl; andeach hetero(C1-4)alicyclyl and hetero(C4-9)bicycloalicyclyl contains 1-4 heteroatoms, each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.
  • 29. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 28, wherein ring A is of the formula
  • 30. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 19, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of (C7)alicyclyl, hetero(C3-6)alicyclyl, (C10-11)bicycloalicyclyl, and hetero(C6-10)bicycloalicyclyl, each unsubstituted or substituted with said 1-5 substituents, wherein the hetero(C3-6)alicyclyl is a seven-membered heterocycloalkyl;the (C10-11)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a seven-membered alicyclyl, and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyl;the hetero(C6-10)bicycloalicyclyl comprises a first ring that is a seven-membered heteroalicyclyl and a second ring that is selected from the group consisting of five, six and seven membered cyclyl; andeach hetero(C3-6)alicyclyl and hetero(C6-10)bicycloalicyclyl contains 1-4 heteroatoms, each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.
  • 31. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 30, wherein ring A is of the formula
  • 32. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein each of said 1-5 substituents of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of halo, cyano, hydroxy, oxy, oxo, carbonyloxy, (C1-10)alkoxy, (C4-12)aryloxy, hetero(C1-10)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, carbonylamino, (C1-10)alkylamino, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, (C1-10)alkyl, (C1-10)alkenyl, (C1-10)alkynyl, halo(C1-10)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-10)alkyl, carbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C1-10)alkyl, sulfonyl(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)cyclo alkyl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C3-12)cycloalkyl(C1-10)alkyl, aryl(C1-10)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)aryl(C1-5)alkyl, hetero(C1-10)alkyl, (C3-12)alicyclic, hetero(C3-12)alicyclic, (C4-12)aryl, and hetero(C1-10)aryl, each unsubstituted or substituted.
  • 33. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein each of said 1-5 substituents of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, oxo, halo, cyano, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkynyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonylamino, (C1-6)alkylaminocarbonyl, (C1-6)alkoxy, amino, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkoxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxylcarbonyl, and (C1-6)alkylsulfonyl, each unsubstituted or substituted.
  • 34. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein each of said 1-5 substituents of ring A is independently selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, fluoro, chloro, cyano, oxo, methoxy, methyl, ethyl, hydroxymethyl, perfluoromethyl, methoxymethyl, methylcarbonylamino, methylaminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyl, methylcarbonyl, hydroxycarbonyl, and methylsulfonyl.
  • 35. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 36. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 37. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 38. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 39. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring A is of the formula
  • 40. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 41. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (C1-6)alkyl, halo(C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, hetero(C1-5)cycloalkyl(C1-3)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl, and hetero(C1-5)cycloalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted.
  • 42. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein R2 is hydrogen.
  • 43. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, amino, thio, oxy, (C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)cycloalkyl, and (C1-6)alkoxy, each unsubstituted or substituted with 1-2 substituents each of which is independently selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, halo, halo(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkyl, (C3-6)cycloalkyl, hetero(C1-5)cycloalkyl, phenyl, and hetero(C1-5)aryl.
  • 44. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, and methoxy.
  • 45. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein R3 is hydrogen.
  • 46. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 1, wherein R3 is methyl.
  • 47. A compound of the formula
  • 48. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 47, wherein R3 is hydrogen.
  • 49. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 47, wherein R9 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, t-butyl, —C(CH3)(OH)CF3, —C(OH)(CH3)2, and —C(CH2OH)(CH3)2; and R7, R8, R10, and R11 are each hydrogen.
  • 50. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 47, wherein R9 is —C(OH)(CH3)2, and R7, R8, R10, and R11 are each hydrogen.
  • 51. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 47, wherein R9 is —C(CH2OH)(CH3)2, and R7, R8, R10, and R11 are each hydrogen.
  • 52. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 47, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 53. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 47, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 54. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 47, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 55. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 47, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 56. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt according to claim 47, wherein ring A is selected from the group consisting of
  • 57. The compound according to claim 1, which is selected from the group of compounds consisting of: N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-cyclopropylbenzamide;N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)nicotinamide;N-(5-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-tert-butylbenzamide;4-tert-butyl-N-(5-(pyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-tert-butylbenzamide;N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(3,5-dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-acetylbenzamide;N-(5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1,1,1-trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;methyl 4-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-ylcarbamoyl)benzoate;4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(2-ethyl-1H-imidazol-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;methyl 4-(5-(3-ethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-ylcarbamoyl)benzoate;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-methylpyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-(methylcarbamoyl)phenyl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-methoxypyrimidin-5-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(6-acetamidopyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(pyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(2-fluoropyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(6-aminopyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)benzamide;4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(6-hydroxypyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(pyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(6-hydroxypyridin-3-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;(R)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-hydroxypyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-morpholinothiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(piperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(3-oxopiperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(2-chloropyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-methoxypyridin-4-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(piperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(4-(hydroxymethyl)piperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(6,7-dihydro-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-5(4H)-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(5-oxo-1,4-diazepan-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-methoxypiperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;(S)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(4-acetylpiperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;(R)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(3-cyanopiperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(4-hydroxypiperidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;(S)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide;(R)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-oxo-3,4,7,8-tetrahydropyrido[4,3-c/]pyrimidin-6(5H)-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide;(S)—N-(5-(2-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;(S)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid;(R)-1-(2-(4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamido)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-5-yl)pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid;N-(5-(3-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)-4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)benzamide;4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(4-(methylsulfonyl)piperazin-1-yl)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide; and4-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)-N-(5-(1,1-dioxothiomorpholino)thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)benzamide; anda pharmaceutically acceptable salt of any one of the aforementioned compounds.
  • 58. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt as defined in claim 1, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
US Referenced Citations (1)
Number Name Date Kind
20080039629 Ramesh et al. Feb 2008 A1
Foreign Referenced Citations (2)
Number Date Country
2001097979 Apr 2001 JP
WO03066630 Aug 2003 WO
Related Publications (1)
Number Date Country
20090318425 A1 Dec 2009 US